Operation/Programming 06/2003 Edition - Siemens

Operation/Programming 06/2003 Edition

ShopTurn SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

ShopTurn

06.03 Edition

Operation/Programming

Introduction 1

Setting Up the Machine

2

Machining the Workpiece

3

Creating a ShopTurn Program

4

ShopTurn Functions 5

G Code Program 6

Tool Management 7

Program Management 8

Messages, Alarms and User Data

9

Examples 10

Appendix A

Valid for Control Software Version SINUMERIK 840D powerline 6 SINUMERIK 840DE powerline 6 SINUMERIK 840Di 2 SINUMERIK 840DiE (Export Version) 2 SINUMERIK 810D powerline 6 SINUMERIK 810DE powerline 6

SINUMERIK® Documentation Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" columns. Status code in the "Remarks" column: A .... New documentation. B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No. C .... Revised edition with new status.

Edition Order No. Remarks 03.01 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP0 A 01.02 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP1 C 06.03 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2 C This manual is also included in the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD) Edition Order No. Remarks 09.03 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG4 C Trademarks

SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIROTEC®, SINUMERIK® and SIMODRIVE® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other names used in this publication may be trademarks, which, if used by third parties for their own means, could infringe the rights of their owners.

Further information is available on the Internet under: http://www.ad.siemens.de/mc This publication was produced with Word 2000 and Designer V7.0. The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. © Siemens AG, 2001–2003. All rights reserved

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement. Subject to change without prior notice.

Order No. 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2 Printed in Germany

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

0 06.03 Preface

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition v

Preface Structure of the

documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts: • General Documentation • User Documentation • Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group This documentation is intended for operators of single-slide turning machines with SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D.

Validity This Operation/Programming Guide is valid for ShopTurn SW 6.4.

Hotline If you have any queries, please contact our hotline: A&D Technical Support Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 E-mail: [email protected]

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax: +49 (9131) 98-2176 The fax form appears with the feedback sheet at the end of the document. E-mail: [email protected]

Website address http://www.cnc-werkstatt.de http://www.ad.siemens.de/mc

SINUMERIK 840D powerline

Enhanced-performance versions SINUMERIK 840D powerline and SINUMERIK 840DE powerline have been available since 09.2001. For a list of available powerline modules, please refer to the hardware description: References: /PHD/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 840D

SINUMERIK 810D powerline

Enhanced-performance versions SINUMERIK 810D powerline and SINUMERIK 810DE powerline have been available since 12.2001. For a list of available powerline modules, please refer to the hardware description: References: /PHC/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 810D

Standard scope This Operation/Programming Guide describes the functionality of the ShopTurn operator interface. Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer. Please contact your local Siemens office for more detailed information about other SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D publications and publications that apply to all SINUMERIK controls (e.g. universal interface, measuring cycles, etc.).

0 Preface 06.03

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved vi SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing.

Principle Your SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D with ShopTurn is designed using state-of-the-art technology in conformity with recognized safety regulations, standards and specifications.

Supplementary devices The applications of Siemens controls can be expanded by adding special additional devices, equipment and expansions supplied by Siemens.

Personnel Only properly trained, authorized, reliable personnel must be allowed to use this equipment. No-one without the necessary training must be allowed to operate the control, even temporarily. The areas of responsibility assigned to personnel involved in setting up, operating and maintaining the equipment must be clearly specified and their compliance verified.

Procedure Before the control is started up, personnel responsible for its operation must have read and understood the Operator's Guides. The company used this equipment is also obliged to carry out continuous monitoring of the overall technical condition of the equipment (with a view to identifying externally visible defects and damage as well as changes in the operating behavior of the control).

Service Repairs to equipment may only be carried out by personnel specially trained and qualified for the application in question in accordance with the provisions specified in the maintenance and servicing guides. All relevant safety regulations must be followed.

The following are deemed as improper usage and exclude the manufacturer from all liability: • Any usage or application incompatible with or beyond the scope of

the items specified above. • Cases where the control is operated in a technically imperfect

condition, without due provision for safety considerations and/or hazards, or in contravention with any of the instructions in the Instruction Manual.

• Cases where faults which could affect safety are not remedied before starting up the control.

• Any modification, bypassing or decommissioning of equipment on the control whose intended purpose is to ensure proper functioning, unrestricted use of equipment and/or active and passive safety.

0 06.03 Preface

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition vii

Warning Unforeseen danger can arise with reference to: • Life and limb of personnel • The control, machine or other assets of the owner and the user.

Structure of the

documentation The following blocks of information, identified by appropriate icons, are used in this documentation:

Orientation

Background information

Operating sequence

Explanation of parameters

Additional notes

Software option The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the appropriate option.

Warnings The following five warnings with varying levels of severity are used in

this document.

Danger Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Warning Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Caution Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.

0 Preface 06.03

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved viii SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

Caution Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Notice Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or

functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine manufacturer:

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is indicated as follows:

References:

A complete list of available literature is included in the Appendix of this Operator's Guide.

Terms Some of the basic terms used in this document are defined below.

Program A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to produce a specific workpiece on the machine.

Contour The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece. More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements.

Cycle A cycle, e.g. tapping, is a subroutine defined in ShopTurn for executing a frequently repeated machining operation (a cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function).

Spindles/axes The various spindles/axes are designated as follows in this docu-ment:

0 06.03 Preface

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition ix

S1: Main spindle S2: Tool spindle S3: Counterspindle C1: C axis, main spindle C3: C axis, counterspindle C3: Special axis (e.g. axis for traversing the counterspindle)

The machine manufacturer might, however, have used other designations.


Unit of measurement Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The

equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below.

Metric Imperial mm in mm/tooth in/tooth mm/min in/min mm/rev in/rev m/min ft/min

0 Preface 06.03

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved x SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

Notes

0 06.03 Contents 0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition xi

Contents Introduction 1-17

1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18 1.1.1 Procedure.................................................................................................................. 1-19

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21 1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.2.3 Keys of the operator panels ...................................................................................... 1-25 1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-27 1.2.5 Elements on the machine control panels .................................................................. 1-27

1.3 Operator interface ..................................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.2 Operation via soft keys and hard keys ...................................................................... 1-33 1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-37 1.3.4 Enter parameters ...................................................................................................... 1-41 1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface...................................................................................... 1-43 1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50)......................................................................................... 1-45

Setting Up the Machine 2-47

2.1 Switching on and off .................................................................................................. 2-48

2.2 Approaching a reference point .................................................................................. 2-48 2.2.1 User agreement for Safety Integrated....................................................................... 2-50

2.3 Operating modes....................................................................................................... 2-51

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52 2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch) ........................................ 2-52 2.4.2 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS).................................................. 2-53 2.4.3 Spindles..................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56 2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-57 2.5.2 Tool list ...................................................................................................................... 2-59 2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually ..................................................................................... 2-65 2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers ........................................................ 2-67 2.5.5 Calibrating the measuring calipers............................................................................ 2-68 2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass............................................................... 2-70

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................. 2-71

2.7 Work offsets.............................................................................................................. 2-72 2.7.1 Setting the work offset............................................................................................... 2-73 2.7.2 Defining work offsets................................................................................................. 2-75 2.7.3 Work offset list .......................................................................................................... 2-76

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-78 2.8.1 Selecting a tool and a spindle ................................................................................... 2-78

0 Contents 06.03

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved xii SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

2.8.2 Traversing the axes...................................................................................................2-80 2.8.3 Positioning the axes ..................................................................................................2-82 2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece.................................................................2-83 2.8.5 Settings for manual mode .........................................................................................2-85

2.9 MDI ............................................................................................................................2-87

Machining the Workpiece 3-89

3.1 Starting/stopping program execution.........................................................................3-90

3.2 Executing a trial program run ....................................................................................3-93

3.3 Displaying the current program block........................................................................3-94

3.4 Repositioning the axes ..............................................................................................3-95

3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program.................................................3-96

3.6 Controlling the program run.....................................................................................3-101

3.7 Testing a program ...................................................................................................3-103

3.8 Correcting the program ...........................................................................................3-104

3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions ........................................................3-105

3.10 Simulation of machining ..........................................................................................3-106 3.10.1 Simulation before machining the workpiece............................................................3-107 3.10.2 Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece.......................................3-109 3.10.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece...................................3-110 3.10.4 Editing the blank shape for a G code program........................................................3-110 3.10.5 Different views of the workpiece..............................................................................3-111 3.10.6 Changing the viewport.............................................................................................3-115

Creating a ShopTurn Program 4-117

4.1 Program structure....................................................................................................4-118

4.2 Fundamentals..........................................................................................................4-120 4.2.1 Machining planes.....................................................................................................4-120 4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and return......................................................................4-122 4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions.....................................................................4-124 4.2.4 Polar coordinates.....................................................................................................4-126 4.2.5 Pocket calculator .....................................................................................................4-127 4.2.6 Fits...........................................................................................................................4-129

4.3 ShopTurn program ..................................................................................................4-130 4.3.1 Overview..................................................................................................................4-130 4.3.2 Create new program................................................................................................4-132 4.3.3 Create program blocks............................................................................................4-136 4.3.4 Change program blocks ..........................................................................................4-140 4.3.5 Program editor.........................................................................................................4-141 4.3.6 Specify number of workpieces ................................................................................4-144

0 06.03 Contents 0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition xiii

ShopTurn Functions 5-145

5.1 Linear or circular path motions................................................................................ 5-147 5.1.1 Selecting the tool and the machining plane ............................................................ 5-147 5.1.2 Straight .................................................................................................................... 5-149 5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-150 5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-152 5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-154 5.1.6 Straight polar ........................................................................................................... 5-155 5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-157

5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-158 5.2.1 Drill centered ........................................................................................................... 5-159 5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-161 5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-162 5.2.4 Deep hole drilling..................................................................................................... 5-164 5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-166 5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-168 5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns ............................................................................ 5-170 5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-171 5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-173 5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-174 5.2.11 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-176 5.2.12 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-178 5.2.13 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 5-180

5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-181 5.3.1 Stock removal cycles .............................................................................................. 5-181 5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-184 5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-187 5.3.4 Thread undercuts .................................................................................................... 5-188 5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-194 5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-195

5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-197 5.4.1 Presentation of the contour ..................................................................................... 5-199 5.4.2 Creating a new contour ........................................................................................... 5-201 5.4.3 Creating contour elements ...................................................................................... 5-202 5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-207 5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-210 5.4.6 Removal of residual material................................................................................... 5-214 5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-216 5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-217 5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-219 5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-221

5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-223 5.5.1 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 5-224

0 Contents 06.03

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved xiv SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-227 5.5.3 Rectangular spigot...................................................................................................5-230 5.5.4 Circular spigot..........................................................................................................5-232 5.5.5 Longitudinal slot.......................................................................................................5-235 5.5.6 Circumferential slot..................................................................................................5-238 5.5.7 Positions ..................................................................................................................5-241 5.5.8 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-242 5.5.9 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-244

5.6 Contour milling.........................................................................................................5-248 5.6.1 Presentation of the contour .....................................................................................5-251 5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-253 5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-255 5.6.4 Changing a contour .................................................................................................5-261 5.6.5 Path milling ..............................................................................................................5-264 5.6.6 Predrilling contour pockets ......................................................................................5-268 5.6.7 Milling contour pockets (roughing) ..........................................................................5-272 5.6.8 Removing residual material from pocket.................................................................5-274 5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-276 5.6.10 Milling contour spigots (roughing)............................................................................5-280 5.6.11 Removing residual material from the spigot............................................................5-282 5.6.12 Finishing the contour spigot.....................................................................................5-284

5.7 Calling a subroutine.................................................................................................5-288

5.8 Repeat program blocks ...........................................................................................5-290

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle ..........................................................................5-292

5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-297

5.11 Calling work offsets .................................................................................................5-298

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations........................................................................5-299

5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle .................................................................5-302

5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program.............................................................5-304

G Code Program 6-307

6.1 Creating a G code program.....................................................................................6-308

6.2 Executing a G code program...................................................................................6-311

6.3 G code editor ...........................................................................................................6-313

6.4 Arithmetic parameters .............................................................................................6-316

Tool Management 7-317

7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine................................................................7-318

7.2 Entering tools in the tool list.....................................................................................7-323 7.2.1 Creating a new tool..................................................................................................7-323 7.2.2 Set up more than one edge for each tool ................................................................7-324 7.2.3 Creating a replacement tool ....................................................................................7-325

0 06.03 Contents 0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition xv

7.3 Sort tools ................................................................................................................. 7-326

7.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ................................................................................ 7-326

7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine.................................................. 7-327

7.6 Relocating a tool...................................................................................................... 7-329

7.7 Entering tool wear data ........................................................................................... 7-331

7.8 Activating tool monitoring ........................................................................................ 7-332

7.9 Managing magazine locations................................................................................. 7-334

Program Management 8-335

8.1 Program management in ShopTurn........................................................................ 8-336

8.2 Program management with PCU 20 ....................................................................... 8-337 8.2.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-339 8.2.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 8-340 8.2.3 Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive ................................ 8-341 8.2.4 Create a new directory/program.............................................................................. 8-342 8.2.5 Mark several programs ........................................................................................... 8-343 8.2.6 Copy/rename a directory or program ...................................................................... 8-344 8.2.7 Delete directory/program......................................................................................... 8-345 8.2.8 Execute program via RS-232 interface ................................................................... 8-346 8.2.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface.............................................................. 8-347 8.2.10 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 8-349 8.2.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data .................................................................... 8-349

8.3 Program management with PCU 50 ....................................................................... 8-352 8.3.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-354 8.3.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 8-355 8.3.3 Load/unload program .............................................................................................. 8-355 8.3.4 Execute a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive ......... 8-356 8.3.5 Create directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-358 8.3.6 Mark several programs ........................................................................................... 8-359 8.3.7 Copy/rename/move a directory or program ............................................................ 8-360 8.3.8 Delete directory/program......................................................................................... 8-362 8.3.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface.............................................................. 8-363 8.3.10 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 8-365 8.3.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data .................................................................... 8-365

Messages, Alarms and User Data 9-369

9.1 Messages................................................................................................................ 9-370

9.2 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 9-370 9.2.1 Cycle alarms ........................................................................................................... 9-371 9.2.2 ShopTurn alarms..................................................................................................... 9-376

9.3 User data................................................................................................................. 9-388

9.4 Version display........................................................................................................ 9-390

0 Contents 06.03

0

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved xvi SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

Examples 10-391

10.1 Standard machining operations.............................................................................10-392

10.2 Contour milling.......................................................................................................10-404

Appendix A-411

A Abbreviations...........................................................................................................A-412

B References ..............................................................................................................A-415

C Index......................................................................................................................... I-427

1 06.03 Introduction 1

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition 1-17

Introduction 1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18

1.1.1 Procedure.................................................................................................................. 1-19

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21 1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.2.3 Keys of the operator panels ...................................................................................... 1-25 1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-27 1.2.5 Elements on the machine control panels .................................................................. 1-27

1.3 Operator interface ..................................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.2 Operation via soft keys and hard keys...................................................................... 1-33 1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-37 1.3.4 Enter parameters ...................................................................................................... 1-41 1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface...................................................................................... 1-43 1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50) ........................................................................................ 1-45

1 Introduction 06.03 1.1 ShopTurn

1

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved 1-18 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

1.1 ShopTurn ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for

turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine and to program workpieces.

Important features of the software are:

Setting up the machine Special measurement cycles make it easier to gauge the tools and the workpiece.

Executing a program You can display the execution of a program on the screen three- dimensionally. This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to trace the machining of the workpiece at the machine.

Creating a program The workpiece is programmed with ease using ShopTurn because graphical techniques are used and no knowledge of G codes is re-quired. ShopTurn displays the program as a clearly understandable process plan and presents the individual cycles and contour elements in a dynamic graphic. The powerful contour calculator allows any contours to be specified. A stock removal cycle complete with detection of residual material saves unnecessary machining.

Tool management ShopTurn saves your tool data. The software can also manage the data for tools that are not in the tool turret.

Program management Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar programs; there is no need to start again from the beginning.

Remote diagnosis You can also switch from ShopTurn into the CNC-ISO operator inter-face. Here it is possible to activate remote diagnosis that allows the machine to be operated via an external computer.

1 06.03 Introduction1.1 ShopTurn

1


1.1.1 Procedure

Two typical working situations are considered separately in this Guide. • You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically

machining a workpiece. • You want to create the program to be used for machining a

workpiece.

Executing a program Before you execute a program, you have to set up your machine. You must perform the following steps with the support of ShopTurn (see the Section "Setting up the machine"): • Approaching the reference point of the machine

(only for incremental position measuring systems) • Gauging tools • Defining the workpiece zero • Entering any other work offsets When you have finished setting up the machine, you can select a program and execute it automatically (see Section "Machining the workpiece").

Creating a program On creating a new program you can choose whether to set up a ShopTurn program or a G code program (see "Creating a ShopTurn program" or "G code program"). On creation of a ShopTurn program, ShopTurn prompts you to enter all the relevant parameters. As the program progresses, this is auto-matically indicated by the appearance of blocks in a progress bar. Help screens that explain the parameters in each operation also support you with programming. You can, of course, also insert G code commands in a ShopTurn program. A G code program must however be completely generated from G code commands.

1 Introduction 06.03 1.2 Workstation

1


1.2 Workstation A ShopTurn workstation comprises an operator panel and a machine

control panel in addition to the turning machine complete with a CNC-/ positioning control.

Turning machinecomplete with control

Operatorpanel

Machinecontrol panel

Diagram showing the workstation

Turning machine You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide turning machine with three axes, one main spindle, one tool spindle and one counterspindle.

Control ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D CNC with PCU 20 and PCU 50.

Operator panel Communication with ShopTurn takes place via the operator panel.

Machine control panel You operate the turning machine using the machine control panel.

1 06.03 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1


1.2.1 Coordinate system

When a workpiece is machined on a turning machine, a rectangular coordinate system is assumed. This comprises the three coordinate axes X, Y and Z parallel to the machine axes. It is not essential that coordinate axis Y is set up. The spindle axis Z, which can be rotated through any angle, is a separate axis of rotation and is designated as C.

The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend on the type of machine used.

WM X+

Z+

Y+

W = Workpiece zero

C

M = Machine zero

Position of the coordinate system, machine zero and workpiece zero (example)


1


1.2.2 Operator panels

You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU:

OP 010 OP 010C OP 010S with OP 032S full CNC keyboard OP 012 OP 015 with 19" full CNC keyboard

OP 010 operator panel

3

4

2

1

6

.

5

2


1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal soft key bar 4 Vertical soft key bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface


1


OP 010C operator panel

3

4

2

1

6

.

5

2

OP 010C operator panel

1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal soft key bar 4 Vertical soft key bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface

OP 010S slimline

operator panel

1

A3

A4A2

5

A2

OP 010S operator panel

1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal soft key bar 4 Vertical soft key bar 5 USB interface


1



1

7A2A3

A4

A2

A4

6

A5


1 12" screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal soft key bar 4 Vertical soft key bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface 7 Mouse


1

5

A2

A3

A4

A2


1 15" screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal soft key bar 4 Vertical soft key bar 5 USB interface


1


1.2.3 Keys of the operator panels

Alarm Cancel Cancel the alarm that is marked with this symbol.

Channel This has no significance for ShopTurn.

Help Toggle between the process plan and programming graphics as well as between the parameterization screen form with programming graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display.

Next Window This has no significance for ShopTurn.

Page Up or Page Down Page upwards or downwards in the directory or in the process plan.

Cursor keys Move between different fields or lines. Use Cursor right to open a directory or program. Use Cursor left to switch to the next higher level in the directory tree.

Select Choose one of a number of options presented. This key has the same function as the "Alternat." soft key.

End Move the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen form.

Backspace • Delete the value in the input field. • Delete the character after the cursor in insertion mode.

Tab This has no significance for ShopTurn.

Shift key Depress the Shift key to enter the uppermost character shown on the dual input keys.


1


Ctrl key Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan and in the G code editor: • Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the start. • Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.

Alt This has no significance for ShopTurn.

Del • Delete the value in the parameter field. • Delete the character marked by the cursor in insertion mode. • Delete machining lines during simultaneous recording and

simulation.

Insert To activate insertion mode or the pocket calculator.

Input key • Terminate entry of a value in the input field. • Open a directory or program.

Alarm - only OP 010 and OP 010C Open the "Messages/Alarms" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" soft key.

Program - only OP 010 and OP 010C Open the "Program" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" soft key.

Offset - only OP 010 and OP 010C Open the "Tools/Offsets" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Tool zero" soft key.

Program Manager - only OP 010 and OP 010C Open the "Program Manager" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Program" soft key.


1


1.2.4 Machine control panels

You can equip your turning machine with a SIEMENS machine control panel or with a specific machine control panel supplied by the machine manufacturer. Siemens can supply a standard machine control panel (19") or the slimline OP 032S machine control panel.

You use the machine control panel to initiate actions on the turning machine such as traversing an axis or starting the machining of a workpiece. When functions are active, the LEDs on the corresponding keys on the machine control panel light up.

1.2.5 Elements on the machine control panels

Emergency stop button Press this pushbutton in an emergency, i.e. when there is a danger to life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece. All drives will be shut down at the greatest possible braking torque.

It is important to read the information provided by the machine manu-facturer concerning additional reactions to operation of the Emergen-cy stop button.

Reset

Reset • Interrupt processing of the current program.

The NC control remains synchronized with the machine. It is in its initial state and ready for a new program run.

• Cancel an alarm.

Jog

Jog Select Machine Manual operating mode.

Teach In

Teach In This has no significance for ShopTurn.

MDI

MDI Select MDI mode.

Auto

Auto Select Machine Auto operating mode.


1


Single Block

Single Block Execute the program non-modally (single block).

Repos

Repos Repositioning, re-approach contour.

Ref Point

Ref Point Approach reference point.

VAR

Inc Var (Incremental Feed variable) Incremental mode with variable increment size.

1

... 10000

Inc (Incremental Feed) Incremental mode with predefined increment size of 1, ..., 10000 increments.

A machine data code determines how the increment value is inter-preted.

Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual.

Cycle Start

Cycle Start Start execution of a program.

Cycle Stop

Cycle Stop Stop execution of a program.

+X ...

Z

Axis keys Traverse the axis in the appropriate direction.

Rapid

Rapid Move axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).

WCS MCS

WCS MCS Switch between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work) and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).


1


%

Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override Raise or lower the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse. The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse). The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the screen as an absolute value and as a percentage.

Feed Stop

Feed Stop Stop executing the running program and shut down axis drives.

Feed Start

Feed Start Continue execution of the program in the current block and ramp up to the feedrate specified in the program.

%

Spindle Override Increase or decrease the programmed spindle speed. The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled from 50 to 120%. The new spindle speed setting appears in the spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent.

Spindle Dec.

Spindle Dec. – only OP032S machine control panel Decrease the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Inc.

Spindle Inc. – only OP032S machine control panel Increase the programmed spindle speed.

100%

100 % – only OP032S machine control panel Restore programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Stop

Spindle Stop Stop spindle.

Spindle Start

Spindle Start Start spindle.


1


Keyswitch You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. The keyswitch

has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7. Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs, data and functions at various protection levels.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove

in the specified positions:

Position 0 No key Protection level 7 Position 1 Key 1 black Protection level 6 Position 2 Key 1 green Protection level 5 Position 3 Key 1 red Protection level 4

Lowest access authorization

↓ Increasing

access authorization ↓

Highest access authorization

When you change the key position to change the access authoriza-tion, this is not indicated immediately in the operator interface. You have to initiate an action first (e.g. close or open directory).

If the PLC is in the Stop state (LEDs on the machine control panel flash), ShopTurn does not evaluate the switch settings on booting.

The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a password. When the password is used, ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch setting.

1 06.03 Introduction1.3 Operator interface

1


1.3 Operator interface

1.3.1 Overview

Screen layout

Operator Interface

1 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode 2 Alarm and message line 3 Program name 4 Program path 5 Channel state and program control 6 Channel operational messages 7 Position display for the axes 8 Display for

• Active tool T • Current feedrate F • Active spindle (S1 = Main spindle, S2 = Tool spindle,

S3 = Counterspindle) 9 Display of active work offsets and rotation 10 Working window 11 Dialog line for additional explanatory text 12 Horizontal soft key bar 13 Vertical soft key bar 14 Soft keys 15 Screen keys

1 Introduction 06.03 1.3 Operator interface

1


Secondary mode REF: Approaching a reference point REPOS: Repositioning INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment INC_VAR: Variable increment

Channel status RESET

active

interrupted

Program control SKP: Skip G code block DRY: Dry run feedrate !ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse override) SBL1: Single block (stop after every block that triggers a function on the machine) SBL2: Not available for selection in ShopTurn (stop after every block) SBL3: Single block fine (stop after every block, even within a cycle) M01: Programmed stop DRF: DRF offset PRT: Program test

Channel operational messages

Stop: An operator action is required.

Wait: No operator action is required.

Feedrate status Feedrate is not enabled

Spindle status Spindle is not enabled

Spindle is stationary

Spindle is turning clockwise

Spindle is turning counterclockwise

Key to meaning of symbol colors: Red: Machine is stationary Green: Machine is running Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action Gray: Other

Screen keys

Machine Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDI or Machine Auto).

Return This has no significance for ShopTurn.


1


Expansion Change horizontal soft key bar.

Menu Select Call main menu:

The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the

program path (4). The program path is then displayed together with the program name (3).


1.3.2 Operation via soft keys and hard keys

The ShopTurn operator interface comprises a range of screen forms, each of which contains eight horizontal and eight vertical soft keys. You operate the soft keys with the keys alongside the soft key bars. Use the soft keys to display a new screen form.

ShopTurn uses 3 operating modes (Machine Manual, MDI and Machine Auto) and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program, Messages/Alarms and Tools/Work offsets).

To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another, press the "Menu Select" key. The main menu is displayed in which you can select the appropriate operating area via a soft key.

Alternatively, you can call the operating areas via the hard keys on the operator panel.

Jog MDI Auto

You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys on the machine control panel. If you select the "Machine" soft key in the main menu, the screen form for the currently active mode appears.


1


If you select another operating mode or operating area, the horizontal and vertical soft key bars change.

Main Menu key

Operating mode


1


If you press a horizontal soft key within an operating mode or operating area, only the vertical soft key bar will change.

Machine Manual operating mode

Function within Machine Manual operating mode


1


When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line in the operator interface, you can change the horizontal soft key bar within an operating area. Press the "Expansion" key. The original horizontal soft key bar will return when you press "Expansion" again.

Within an operating mode or operating area, you can use the soft key "Back" to return to the higher-level screen form.

Use the "Abort" soft key to exit a screen form without accepting the entered values and return to the higher-level screen form.

When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parame-terization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form and save the parameters using the "Accept" soft key.

Use the "OK" soft key to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename or delete a program.

On

If you activate functions using soft keys, the soft key displays a black background.

Program test Off

To deactivate the function, you must press the soft key again. The soft key then has a gray background again.


1


1.3.3 Program views

You can display different views of a ShopTurn program.

Program manager In the program manager, you can manage all your programs. You can also select a program here for machining the workpiece.

Program manager

-or-

Select the program manager with the "Program" soft key or "Program Manager" key.

You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.

Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.

Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level.

-or-

Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a program.


1


Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining steps of a program.

Process plan

You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the pro-gramming graphics.

Programming graphic The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece in dy-namic broken-line graphics. The program block selected in the machining plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphic.

Programming graphic


1


Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process plan. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with program-ming graphics is then displayed.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics complete with the parameters.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a para-meterization screen form.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and the help display.


1


Parameter screen with help display

The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the parameters of the machining step individually.

Parameter screen with help display

The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning:Yellow circle = reference point Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate


1


1.3.4 Enter parameters

On setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter values in the white fields for various parameters. Parameters with gray input fields are automatically calculated by ShopTurn.

Parameter

White fieldinput

Unit

Gray fieldinput

Parameterization screen form

Select parameters

In the case of certain parameters, you can select from a number of options in the input field. In such field, it is not possible to type a value.

-or-

��Press the "Alternat." soft key or the "Select" key until the required setting is displayed.

The "Alternat." soft key is only visible when the cursor is positioned on an input field which has a choice of options. The "Select" key is also only effective in this situation.

Enter parameters

For the remaining parameters, enter a numerical value in the input field using the keys on the operator panel.

��Enter the desired value.

��Press the "Input" key to terminate entry.

-or- If you don't want to enter a value, i.e. not even "0", press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.


1


Select units

For certain parameters, you can choose between different units.

-or-

��Press the "Alternat." soft key or the "Select" key until the required units are displayed.

The "Alternat." soft key is only visible when you have a choice of units for this parameter. The "Select" key is also only effective in this situation.

Clear a parameter

If an input field contains an invalid value, you can delete it completely.

-or-

��Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

Change or calculate parameters

If you only want to change individual characters in an input field and not overwrite the complete entry, switch to insert mode. In this mode, the pocket calculator is also active. You can use it during program-ming to calculate parameter values.

��Press the "Insert" key.

Insert mode and the pocket calculator are activated.

You can move around within the input field using the "Cursor left" and "Cursor right" keys. Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters.

For further information about the pocket calculator, see the Section "Pocket calculator".

Accept parameters

When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parame-terization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form and save the parameters.

-or-

��Press the "Accept" soft key or the "Cursor left" key. If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the "Cursor left" key to accept the parameters, you must position the cursor in the input field on the far left.

You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously erroneous. In this case, you can see from the dialog line which para-meters are missing or were entered incorrectly.


1


1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface

You can switch from the ShopTurn interface to the CNC-ISO interface. You can activate remote diagnosis here. This enables the control to be operated via an external computer.

The machine manufacturer must have enabled switchover from the

ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. For a more detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface,

please refer to: References: /BEM/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide SINUMERIK 840D/810D /BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

The remote diagnosis function is a software option.

For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to: References: /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions, F3 Remote Diagnosis

CNC-ISO operator

interface

��Press the "CNC ISO" soft key in the horizontal soft key bar.

-and-

��Then press the "CNC ISO" soft key in the vertical soft key bar.


1


CNC-ISO operator interface

��If you wish to return to the ShopTurn operator interface, press the "Menu Select" soft key.

-and-

ShopTurn

��Press the "ShopTurn" soft key.

Remote diagnosis

��Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Diagnosis

��Press the "Diagnosis" soft key.

Remote diagnosis

��Press the "Remote diagnosis" soft key.


1


1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50)

Two different variants of the ShopTurn software are available for the PCU 50, i.e. ShopTurn Classic and ShopTurn Open. ShopTurn Classic is the software that has been marketed to date under the name ShopTurn.

ShopTurn Open differs from the ShopTurn Classic variant in terms of

its basic menu bar and extended basic menu bar. In ShopTurn Open you cannot switch over to the CNC-ISO operator interface. Instead, you can access the HMI Advanced operating areas "Services", "Diagnosis", "Start-Up" and "Parameters" (without tool management and work offsets) directly via soft keys in the extended horizontal soft key menu.

For a detailed description of the integrated HMI Advanced operating

areas, please refer to: References: /BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Some of the soft keys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer.


��

�

�


1


Notes

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine 2


Setting Up the Machine 2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-48

2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-48 2.2.1 User agreement for Safety Integrated....................................................................... 2-50

2.3 Operating modes....................................................................................................... 2-51

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52 2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch) ........................................ 2-52 2.4.2 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS) ................................................. 2-53 2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56 2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-57 2.5.2 Tool list ...................................................................................................................... 2-59 2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually ..................................................................................... 2-65 2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers........................................................ 2-67 2.5.5 Calibrating the measuring calipers............................................................................ 2-68 2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass .............................................................. 2-70

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................. 2-71

2.7 Work offsets .............................................................................................................. 2-72 2.7.1 Setting the work offset .............................................................................................. 2-73 2.7.2 Defining work offsets................................................................................................. 2-75 2.7.3 Work offset list........................................................................................................... 2-76

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-78 2.8.1 Selecting a tool and a spindle ................................................................................... 2-78 2.8.2 Traversing the axes................................................................................................... 2-80 2.8.3 Positioning the axes .................................................................................................. 2-82 2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece ................................................................ 2-83 2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-85

2.9 MDI............................................................................................................................ 2-87

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.1 Switching on and off

2


2.1 Switching on and off Please refer to the instructions in the machine manufacturer's manual with

regard to switching the control or machine on and off. The Machine Manual basic display appears when the control has booted

up.

Basic display Machine Manual

2.2 Approaching a reference point Your turning machine is equipped either with an absolute position measuring

system or with an incremental position measuring system. After you switch on the control system, an incremental position measuring system must be calibrated but an absolute position measuring system does not require calibration. On an incremental position measuring system, therefore, all the machine axes must first approach a reference point whose coordinates are known with reference to the machine zero.

The machine manufacturer specifies the order in which you have to

reference the axes. It is possible to reference all axes simultaneously (depending on the setting of the machine manufacturer).


The feedrate override is active during reference point approach.

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.2 Approaching a reference point

2


Caution

The coordinates of the actual-value display are invalid before referencing is performed. The limits set by the machine manufacturer for axis travel are also inactive.

Caution

During referencing, the axes approach the reference point in a straight line. For this reason, you must traverse the axes to a safe position beforehand to prevent a collision during reference point approach. Please pay careful attention to the actual axis movements on the machine during reference point approach.

Reference axes

Jog

��Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Ref Point

��Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

+X ...

Z

��Press an axis key.

Your selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with

. If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected, the axis does not move.

Interrupt axis motion

Feed Stop

��Press the "Feed Stop" key. The axis stops.

Re-approach axis

+X ...

Z

��Press the axis key again. The axis will traverse in the direction of the reference point again.

When all the machine axes have been referenced in this manner, the position measuring system has been calibrated and the travel limits set for the axes are effective. The correct coordinates for the reference point are now shown in the actual-value display.

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.2 Approaching a reference point

2


2.2.1 User agreement for Safety Integrated

If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. Your confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety Integrated functions.

You can only confirm your user agreement for an axis after it has

approached the reference point.

The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate system (MCS).

For further information about user agreement, please refer to: References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Jog


Ref Point

��Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

+X ...

Z

��Press an axis key.

Your selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is marked with

.

User Agreement

��Select the "User Agreement" soft key.

��Position the cursor on the relevant axis.

��Confirm the machine position.

The axis status is now "safely referenced".

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.3 Operating modes

2


2.3 Operating modes Three different operating modes can be used in ShopTurn:

• Manual mode • MDI (Manual Data Automatic) • Automatic mode

Manual mode Manual mode is used for the following preparatory actions:

• Reference point approach, i.e. calibration of the position measuring system

• Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. gauging tools, gauging the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program

• Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption • Positioning the axes • Simple stock removal from the workpiece

Jog

You can select manual mode by pressing the "Jog" soft key. The parameters set under "T, S, M..." affect all movements in manual mode with the exception of reference point approach.

MDI In MDI mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-modally to set up the machine or to perform a single action.

MDI

You can select MDI mode via the "MDI" key.

Automatic mode In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical display on the screen.

Auto

You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.4 Settings for the machine

2


2.4 Settings for the machine

2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch)

You can specify either millimeters or inches as the unit of measurement for the machine. The switchover applies to the entire machine and all para-meters are converted automatically to the new unit of measurement by ShopTurn, e.g.: • Positions • Tool offsets • Work offsets

Regardless of the general machine setting, you can still change the unit of measurement for manual mode (see Section "Settings for manual mode") or for individual programs (see Section "Creating a new program"). These settings for the unit of measurement refer, however, only to the program-med positions. Tool offsets, work offsets, etc. remain in the unit of measurement set for the machine as a whole. If, for example, you set millimeters as the unit of measurement for the machine, but a workpiece drawing is dimensioned in inches, the inch unit of measurement can be selected for this program. You can therefore specify the positions directly in inches on programming, but you will specify tool offsets, feedrates and so on as usual in millimeters.

Jog

��Open the extended horizontal soft key menu in "Machine Manual" mode.

��Press the "ShopT. sett." soft key.

Inch

�� Press the "Inch" soft key. Inch

Unit of measurement: Millimeter (soft key is deselected) Inch

Unit of measurement: Inch (soft key is selected.)

A prompt asks whether you really want to switch over the unit of measurement.

��Press the "OK" soft key.

The unit of measurement will be changed accordingly for the machine as a whole.

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.4 Settings for the machine

2


2.4.2 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS)

The coordinates in the actual value display are based on either the machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system. In contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS), the machine coordinate system (MCS) does not take into account work offsets (see Section "work offsets"). The workpiece coordinate system is the default setting for the actual value display.

WCS MCS

��Press the "WCS MCS" key.

-or-

Jog -or- Auto

��Select "Machine Manual" or "Machine Auto" mode.

-and-

Actualvalue MCS

��Press the "Actual value MCS" soft key to select or deselect this coordinate system. Actualvalue MCS WCS = work (soft key is deselected) Actualvalue MCS MCS = machine (soft key is selected)

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.4 Settings for the machine

2


2.4.3 Spindles

If your turning machine has a counterspindle, or if you wish to use the spindle chuck as a reference point for manual tool measurement, you must specify the spindle dimensions.

Counterspindle You can measure either the front edge or the stop edge of the

counterspindle. The measured edge then automatically applies as the reference point when the counterspindle traverses. This is particularly important when the counterspindle is used to grip the workpiece (see Section "Machining with the counterspindle").

Front edge Stop edge

Counterspindle measurement

Please read the manufacturer's instructions with respect to the "Clamp" parameter.

Manual tool

measurement If you wish to use the clamp for the main spindle or counterspindle as a reference point for manual tool measurement, you must specify the clamp dimension ZL0 or ZL1.

��Select the "Tools WOs" operating area.

��Press the "Expansion" key.

��Select the "Spindles" soft key.

��Enter the parameters.

The settings take effect immediately.

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.4 Settings for the machine

2


Parameters Description Unit

S1 Speed limit for main spindle rpm

Clamp Main spindle: Clamp workpiece internally or externally

ZL0 Chuck dimension, main spindle (inc) mm

S3 Speed limit for counterspindle rpm

Clamp Counterspindle: Clamp workpiece internally or externally

Jaw type Dimensions of front edge or stop edge

ZL1 Chuck dimension, counterspindle (inc) mm

ZL2 Stop dimension, counterspindle (inc) mm

ZL3 Jaw dimension, counterspindle (inc) – (only when stop edge dimensions apply) mm

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.5 Tools

2


2.5 Tools The various tool geometry parameters must be referenced while the

program is running. These are entered as so-called tool offset data in the tool list. Each time a tool is called up, the control takes into account the tool offset data.

You then only have to enter the workpiece dimensions from the manufacturing drawing during programming. The control will automatically calculate the individual tool path.

Tool length

compensation Tool length compensation equalizes the length variations in the X and Z directions between the different tools. The tool length is the distance between the tool carrier reference point T and the tool tip P. If the tool is clamped differently in the tool turret for a new machining direction, a different tool length offset applies.

T

T Length Z Length Z

Leng

th X

Leng

th X

P

P

X

Z

Tool length offsets

The tool length offset is determined with the "Measure tools" function, either manually or using measuring calipers or a magnifying glass. The control calculates the travel movements from the tool length offset and wear data (see Section "Entering the tool wear data").

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.5 Tools

2


Tool/tool nose radius compensation

The workpiece contour and the traverse path of a tool are not identical, because the center point of a tool is not intended to travel along the contour to be machined.

ShopTurn displaces the programmed tool path as a function of tool radius and machining direction in such a way that the tool edge travels exactly along the programmed contour. This displaced tool path is called the equidistant path.

Equidistant Equidistant

Equidistant path during turning and milling

The control calculates the displaced tool path from the tool radius that is entered in the tool list and the wear data (see Section "Entering the tool wear data").

Please refer to "Creating program blocks" for more information about radius compensation.

2.5.1 Creating a new tool

You must enter a new tool in the tool list before you can use it. When you create a new tool, ShopTurn presents a choice of tool types. The tool type determines which geometry data are required and how they will be computed.


2


Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.

��Mount the new tool in the turret (see also Section "Select tool and

spindle").

��Select the "Tool list" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

��Place the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in the tool turret. The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New > tool

��Press the "New tool" soft key.

Roughing tool ...

3D_Probe

��Select the desired tool type and tool direction with the soft keys. Additional tool types and tool point directions can be called up by pressing the "Further" soft key.

The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the selected tool type.

��Enter a unique tool name. You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore symbol "_", periods "." and slashes "/".

��Enter the offset data of the tool.


2


2.5.2 Tool list

Enter all the tool parameters in the tool list that are required: • For calculating the tool length compensation or radius

compensation, • For calculating the machining cycles, • For displaying the tools in the simulated program execution.

Various parameters are required depending on the tool type.

Leng

th X

Cutter radius

Length Z

Plat

e le

ngth

Toolholder angle

Plate angleCutting direction

Roughing/Finishing tool

Plat

e le

ngth

Radius Plate width

Leng

th X

Length Z

Recessing tool

Leng

th X

Length Z

Diameter

Milling tool


2


Leng

th X

Diameter

Length Z

Tip angle

Drill

Leng

th X

Length Z

Radius

Threading tool

Le

ngth

X

Radius

Length Z

Mushroom head tool

Dia

met

er

Length Z Leng

th X

Dead stop


2


Leng

th X

Length Z

Bore Ø

Radius

Rotary drill

Toolholder angle

Plate angle

88° 90°

Rotary drill

Leng

th X

Length Z

Diameter

Pitc

h

Screw tap

Length ZLe

ngth

X

Dia

met

er

3D probe


2


Tool list

The tool list may have been altered by the machine manufacturer.


Loc. Location number in the magazine

The location number of the tool in the machining position in the turret is displayed with a gray background.

If you are working with more than one magazine, you will see the magazine number here first followed by the location number within the magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently in a magazine are listed without a location number (these tools can be found at the end of the tool list when the list is sorted according to magazine location number).

The locations for a spindle and a double gripper can also be displayed for chain and plate magazines.


Spindle location

Locations for grippers 1 and 2

Type Tool type and tool point direction You can change the tool point direction of the tool with the "Alternat." soft key.

Tool name A tool is identified by its name. A tool name can be entered as text or a number (see Section "Creating a new tool").

DP Duplo number of the sister tool (replacement tool) (DP 1 = Original tool, DP 2 = First replacement tool, DP 3 = Second replacement tool, etc.)


2


Tool offset data Cutting edge Tool offset data for the selected cutting edge of a tool (D No.)

Length X Tool length offset in the X direction You can determine this value using the "Measure tool" function (see Section "Measuring the tool manually" or "Measuring the tool with the magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value here.

Length Z Tool length offset in the Z direction You can determine this value using the "Measure tool" function (see Section "Measuring the tool manually" or "Measuring the tool with the magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value here.

Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool You can also enter the diameter for milling cutters and drills, but only the tool radius for turning tools. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Direction of motion for holder angle

Holder angle of a cutting tool The holder angle is taken into account during relief cutting.

Holder angle of a cutting tool The cutting tip angle is taken into account during relief cutting.

Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev or turns/"

Bore ∅ Diameter of bore for a rotary drill

Tip.width Tip width of grooving tool ShopTurn needs the tip width to calculate the grooving cycles.

Tip.length Tip length of a cutting or grooving tool ShopTurn needs the tip length to display tools when simulating the program run.

N Number of teeth on a milling cutter The control system uses this to calculate the revolutional feedrate internally if the feed is set in mm/tooth in the program.

Angle of tool tip on a drilling machine If you want to insert a drill down to the shank, and not just to the tool tip, the control will need the angle of the drill tip.


2


Tool-specific functions

Specification of direction of spindle rotation The direction of spindle rotation applies to the tool spindle in the case of driven tools (drill and milling tool), and to the main spindle or counterspindle in the case of turning tools.

If you are using a drill or milling tool for "Drill centered" or "Thread centered", the specified direction of rotation thus refers to the cutting direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates in the same direction as the tool.

Clockwise spindle rotation

Counterclockwise spindle rotation

Spindle not activated

Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) on/off Coolant on

Coolant off It is not essential to set up the coolant supply on the machine first.


��Enter the required tool names and the values for the tool offset

data in the tool list.

-or-

��Press the "Alternat." soft key or the "Select" key to make the required settings for the tool-specific functions.


2


2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually

For manual measurement, move the tool manually to a known reference point in order to determine the tool dimensions in the X and Z direction. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the position of the toolholder reference point and the reference point.

As a reference point you can either use the workpiece edge or, when

measuring in the Z direction, the main spindle or counterspindle chuck.

The position of the workpiece edge can be specified during the measurement process. The position of the chuck on the other hand must be specified before starting the measurement (see "Spindles").

Workpiece edge as

reference point

Jog

��Select the "Meas. tool" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

��Press the "Manual" soft key.

X -or-

Z

��Press the "X" or "Z" soft key to define the tool length that you want to measure.

Tools

��Press the "Tools" soft key.

��Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The tool point direction and the radius or diameter of the tool must already be entered in the tool list.

Back tomanual

��Press the "Back to manual" soft key.

The tool is loaded into the "Measure tool" screen form.

��Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the tool.

��Move the tool towards the workpiece to be measured and scratch the workpiece (see Section "Traversing the axes").


2


Measure length X Measure length Z

��Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0. Until a value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is loaded from the actual-value display.

Setlength

��Press the "Set length" soft key.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automati-cally taken into account.

Storeposition

If you want to save the position of the tool after scratching the workpiece, press the "Store position" soft key. Then you can, for example, traverse the axes for the purpose of measuring the position of workpiece edge X0 more easily.

Chuck as reference point

Jog

��Select the "Measure tool" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

Z

��Press the "Manual" and "Z" soft keys.

Tools



Back to manual


The tool is loaded into the "Meas. tool" screen form.

��Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the tool.

��Traverse to the chuck and scratch it (see Section "Traversing the axes").


2


Measure length Z

Setlength


The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automati-cally taken into account.

2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers

For automatic measurement, determine the tool dimensions in the X and Z directions using measuring calipers. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the known position of the toolholder reference point and the measuring calipers.

If you wish to use measuring calipers to measure your tools, a special

cycle has to be set up by the machine manufacturer. If there is a second set of measuring calipers on the counterspindle,

the machine manufacturer must specify it in a machine data code.


Before the actual measuring operation you must enter the tool point direction and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list. You must also calibrate the measuring calipers in advance.

��Fit the tool that you wish to measure (see "Selecting a tool and

spindle").

Jog

��Select the "Meas. tool" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

Autom. >

��Press the "Autom." soft key.

X -or-

Z

��Press the "X" or "Z" soft key to define the tool length that you want to measure.


2


Measure length X Measure length Z ��Select cutting edge number D on the tool.

��If there are two sets of measuring calipers on the machine, choose whether you want to use the measuring calipers on the main spindle or counterspindle.

��Position the tool manually close to the measuring calipers, so that the measuring calipers can be moved in the appropriate direction without risk of collision.

Cycle Start

��Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The automatic measuring operation starts, i.e. the tool is moved to the calipers and back again at measuring feedrate. The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automatically taken into account.

2.5.5 Calibrating the measuring calipers

If you wish to measure your tools automatically, you must first determine the position of the measuring calipers in the machine space relative to machine zero.

The "Calibrate measuring calipers" function is only available if the

password for protection level 1 is set. In order to calibrate the measuring calipers you must move them from

4 directions (+X, –X, +Z, –Z). You should use a roughing or finishing calibration tool. The cutting edge (tool point direction) must always be pointing in the –X and –Z direction for this process. Enter the length and radius or diameter of the calibration tool in the tool list.

If there is a second set of measuring calipers on the counterspindle, the machine manufacturer must specify it in a machine data code.



2


��Fit the calibration tool.

Jog


Calibrate meas. cal.

��Press the "Calibrate measuring calipers" soft key.

X -or-

Z

��Press the "X" or "Z" soft key according to which point of the measuring calipers you wish to measure first.

Calibrate measuring calipers in X Calibrate measuring calipers in Z

��If there are two sets of measuring calipers on the machine, choose whether you want to use the measuring calipers on the main spindle or counterspindle.

��Choose the direction (+ or –) in which you wish to approach the measuring calipers.

��Position the calibration tool close to the measuring calipers so that the first point of the measuring calipers can be approached without risk of collision.

Cycle Start


The calibration operation starts, i.e. the calibration tool is automati-cally moved to the calipers and back again at measuring feedrate. The position of the measuring calipers is determined and stored in an internal data area.

��Repeat the operation for the other 3 points of the measuring calipers.


2


2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass

If a magnifying glass is installed on the machine, it can be used to determine the tool dimensions. ShopTurn calculates the tool offset data from the known positions of the toolholder reference point and the cross-hair of the magnifying glass.

Jog


Zoom >

��Press the "Zoom" soft key.

Tools

Back to manual




��Traverse the tool to the magnifying glass (see Section "Traversing the axes").

��Align the tool tip P with the cross-hair of the magnifying glass.

Setlength


The tool lengths area calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. The tool radius or diameter and the tool point direction are automatically taken into account.

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

2


2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the

workpiece zero. To determine this zero, you measure the length of the workpiece and store the position of the cylinder end face in the Z direction in a work offset. In other words, the position is stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

In order to be able to measure the tool, a tool of known lengths must

be in the machining position (see Section "Selecting a tool and a spindle").

Jog

��Select the "Meas. workp." soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

��Select the offset in which the position is to be stored.

-or- Work

offset ��Press the "Work offset" soft key.

-and- ��Position the cursor on the required work offset.

-and- Back to

manual ��Press the "Back to manual" soft key.

��Traverse the tool in the Z direction and scratch the workpiece (see Section "Traversing the axes").

��Enter the setpoint position of workpiece edge Z0.

Set workoffset

��Press the "Set work offset" soft key.

The workpiece zero and therefore the work offset is calculated. The tool length is automatically included in the calculation.

Example: Setpoint position of workpiece edge Z0 = 0 Tool length compensation Z = 37.6 mm � Z = –37.6

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.7 Work offsets

2


2.7 Work offsets Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the

axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine). The program for machining the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical. The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in accordance with the type of tool and how it is clamped. This work offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can be a combination of different offsets.

The offsets are summed as follows:

Basic offset MCS

M

WCSW

Totaloffset

Work offset coarse

Coordinate transformation

Work offset fine

Work offsets

When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least one offset (basic offset or work offset) exists in which the position of the workpiece zero is saved.

Basic offset The basic offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not defined a basic offset, its value will be zero. Specify the basic offset using "Workpiece zero" ("see Section "Measuring the workpiece zero") or "Set WO" (see Section "Setting the work offset").

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.7 Work offsets

2


Work offsets Every work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any ShopTurn program (coarse and fine offset are added together). You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine offset.

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


For instructions on specifying and calling work offsets, see Sections "Defining work offsets" and "Calling work offsets".

Coordinate transformations

Coordinate transformations are only ever programmed for a specific ShopTurn program. They are defined by: • Offset • Rotation • Scaling • Mirroring (See Section "Defining the coordinate transformations")

Total offset The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate transformations.

2.7.1 Setting the work offset

You can save the workpiece zero using "Set WO" as an alternative to "Workpiece zero".

The offset (active work offset or basic offset) in which the new zero is

stored is defined in a machine data code.


If the values are stored in the active work offset, they are stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

The currently active work offset is displayed under the position window for the axes.

��Traverse the machine axes to the required position, e.g. to the

end face of the workpiece (see Section "Traversing the axes").

��If you do not want to save the zero point in the currently active work offset or the basic offset, select another one (see Section "Settings for manual mode").


2


Jog

��Select the "Set WO" soft key in "Machine Manual" operating mode.

Set basic work offset

��Enter the required new position value for Z, X or Y directly in the actual value display. You can use the cursor keys to change between axes.

��Press the "Input" key.

-or-

Z=0

��Press the "Z=0" soft key if you want the position value to be set to zero.

The new zero point is saved in the currently active work offset or in the basic offset.

Delete

If you want to delete the saved zero point again, select the "Delete" soft key.


2


2.7.2 Defining work offsets

Enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The total number of work offsets permitted is specified in a machine data code.


��Select the "Work offset" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

The work offset list is displayed.

��Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset that you wish to define.

��Enter the desired coordinates for the respective axis. You can use the cursor keys to change between axes.

-or-

Position set X ...

Position set Z

��Press the "Position set X", "Position set Y" or "Position set Z" soft key to accept the position value of an axis from the position display for a coarse offset.

-or-

Position set all

��Press the "Position set all" soft key to accept the position values of all axes from the position display for a coarse offset.

The new coarse offset is set. The values from the fine offset are included in the calculation and then deleted.

Clear offset

��Press the "Clear offset" soft key to delete the coarse and fine offset values at the same time.

Further axes

Press the "Further axes" soft key to display a further three axes (2 rotary axes, 1 linear axis) and define their offset. These additional axes must be activated via machine data.



2


2.7.3 Work offset list

The individual work offsets as well as the total offset are all displayed in the work offset list. The currently active work offset is displayed on a gray background. The work offset list also includes the current axis positions in the machine and workpiece coordinate systems.

If your turning machine has a counterspindle, the column on the far

right also displays the work offset which has been mirrored for machining with the counterspindle. If necessary, you can deactivate work offset mirroring again.

Work offset list

Basic offset

Basic The coordinates of the basic offset appear. You can change these here in the list.

Work offsets

WO1 ... WO4 The coordinates of the individual work offsets (line 1: coarse offset, line 2: fine offset) appear. You can edit them here in the list (see Section "Defining the work offsets"). Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


You can display more work offsets with the "Page Down" key.


2


Coordinate transformations

Program The active coordinates of the "Offset" transformation are displayed as well as the angle set in the "Rotation" transformation by which the coordinate system rotates. You cannot edit these values here.

Scale The active scaling factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed for the respective axis. You cannot edit these values here.

Mirror The mirror axis that was defined by means of the "Mirroring" trans-formation is displayed. You cannot edit these values here.

Total offset

Total The total offset resulting from the basic offset and all active work offsets and coordinate transformations appears.

Further axes

Press the "Further axes" soft key to display a further three axes (2 rotary axes, 1 linear axis) and define their offset. These additional axes must be activated via machine data.


��Select the "Work offset" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

The work offset list appears.

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.8 Manual mode

2


2.8 Manual mode Use "Machine Manual" mode to set up the machine for executing a

program or when you want to perform simple traversing movements at the machine.

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and a spindle

For the preparatory work in manual mode, tool selection and spindle control are performed centrally in a screen form. In addition to the main spindle (S1), a tool spindle also exists for driven tools (S2). Your turning machine may also be equipped with a counterspindle (S3).

You can select a tool in manual mode either via its name or via its

turret location number. If you enter a number, ShopTurn first searches for a name and then for the location number, i.e. if you input "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists, then the tool with location number "5" is selected.

Using the turret location number in this way, you can swivel an empty location into machining position and then load a new tool with ease.

Selecting a tool

Jog

��Select the "T, S, M" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

��Enter the name or the number of the tool T.

-or-

Tools -or-

��Call up the tool list by pressing the "Tools" soft key or the "Offset" key.

-and-

��Place the cursor on the required tool in the tool list. Only one tool can be selected from the tool turret.

-and-

Back to manual


The tool is transferred to the "T, S, M... window".

��Select tool edge D and enter the number directly in the field.

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.8 Manual mode

2


Cycle Start


The tool is automatically swiveled into the machining position and the name of the tool is displayed in the tool status line.

Start spindle

Jog


��In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2) or the counterspindle (S3).

��Enter the desired spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.

��If your machine has a gear unit for the spindle, you can set the gear stage.

��Select the direction of spindle rotation in the field below:

Spindle rotates clockwise

Spindle rotates counterclockwise

Cycle Start


The spindle rotates.

Stop spindle

Jog


��Select the "Stop spindle" function in the bottom spindle field.

Cycle Start


The spindle stops.

Change spindle speed S

Jog


��Enter the desired spindle speed.

Cycle Start


The spindle continues to rotate at a different speed.

Position spindle

Jog



2


��Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2) or the counterspindle (S3).

��Select the "Spindle position" function in the field below.

��Enter the desired spindle position (in degrees) in the "Stop Pos." parameter field.

Cycle Start


A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route. A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.

2.8.2 Traversing the axes

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis keys or handwheels. During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the selected axis moves by a specified increment with the programmed setup feedrate.

You can move the axes simultaneously depending on the machine manufacturer's settings.


The feedrate and rapid traverse overrides are active during traversal.

Traversing the axes using the keyboard

��Choose a tool, if applicable (see Section "Selecting a tool and a spindle").

Jog

��Open the extended horizontal soft key menu in "Machine Manual" mode.

��Press the "ShopTurn sett." soft key.

��Enter a value for parameter "Setup feedrate" in mm/min and mm/rev.

To find out which of the two feedrates is applied to traverse the axes, please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can move the axes in fixed or variable increments.


2


1

... 10000

��Press one of the keys [1], [10], ..., [10000] to move the axis through a defined increment. The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in micrometers or micro-inches. Example: For an increment of 100 µm (= 0.1 mm), press the "100" key.

-or-

Jog

��Open the extended horizontal soft key menu in "Machine Manual" mode. -and-

��Press the "ShopT. sett." soft key. -and-

��Enter your selected setting for the parameter "Variable increment". Example: For an increment of 500 µm (= 0.5 mm), enter 500. -and-

VAR

��Press the "Inc Var" key.

+X

��Press the axis key in the appropriate direction.

Each time you press the axis key, the axis moves through the selected increment.

If you want to traverse more than one axis simultaneously, you must press the relevant axis keys simultaneously.

Traversing the axes using a handwheel

Please note the machine manufacturer's instruction manual with regard to the selection and mode of operation of handwheels.


2


2.8.3 Positioning the axes

In Manual mode, you can move the axes to certain positions for the purpose of performing simple machining operations. The feedrate and rapid traverse overrides are active during traversal.

��Choose a tool, if applicable (see Section "Selecting a tool and a

spindle").

Jog

��Select the "Position" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

��Enter the target position for the axis/axes that you wish to move.

Rapid traverse

��Enter your selected setting for feedrate F.

-or-

��Press the "Rapid traverse" soft key.

Cycle Start


The axis is moved to the specified target position. If target positions have been specified for more than one axis, these axes will traverse simultaneously.


2


2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece

Some blanks do not have a smooth or even surface. Use the stock removal cycle, for example, to turn the end face of the workpiece flat before machining actually begins.

In order for simple stock removal from a workpiece to function in manual

mode, a gauged tool must be in the machining position (see Section "Select a tool and a spindle").

If you wish to bore a chuck with the stock removal cycle, you can program an undercut (XF2) in the corner.

Caution

The tool moves in a straight line to the starting point for stock removal. Traverse the tool to a safe position beforehand to prevent a collision during approach.

Jog

��Select the "Stock removal" soft key in "Machine Manual" mode.

��Enter the desired values for the parameters.


The input form is closed.

Stock removal in manual mode

Cycle Start


The "Stock removal" cycle is started.


2



F, S, V See Section "Create program blocks". In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter you can choose between main spindle (S1) and counterspindle (S3). In the right-hand input field, enter the spindle speed or the cutting rate.

Machining type

Roughing Finishing

Position Roughing position:

Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)

Outside Inside Outside Inside

parallel to X axis (plane)

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm

Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm

FS Chamfer (n=1...3) alternative to R mm

R Radius (n=1...3) alternative to FS mm

XF2 Undercut (as an alternative to FS2 or R2) mm

D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm


2


2.8.5 Settings for manual mode

For manual mode, you can select the central machine functions and work offsets and set the unit of measurement. Machine functions (M functions) are functions, such as "Close door" or "Release chuck" that are additionally provided by the machine manufacturer.


In manual mode, you can display the axis positions and distance- defining parameters either in "mm" or "inches". Tool offsets and work offsets remain, however, in the original unit of measurement in which the machine was set (see Section "Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch)").

Select M function

Jog


��In the "Misc. M fct." parameter field, enter the number of the desired M function. Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation between the meaning and number of the function. Example:

M function Description ... ... M88 Close door ... ...

"88" must be entered in the input field to close the door.

The M function will be active when you next press the "Cycle Start" key.

Select work offset

Jog


��Select the required work offset.

-or-

Work offset

Back to manual

��Press the "Work offset" soft key.

-and-

��Position the cursor on the required work offset.

-and-



2


The work offset will be active when you next press the "Cycle Start" key.

Set unit of measurement

Jog


��Select the unit of measurement.

The unit of measurement will be active in manual mode when you next press the "Cycle Start" key.

2 06.03 Setting Up the Machine2.9 MDI

2


2.9 MDI In "MDI" (Manual Data Automatic) mode, you can enter G code

commands non-modally to set up the machine and execute them immediately.

During execution of the G code commands, you can intervene as

follows: • Execute the program non-modally • Testing a program • Set up dry run feedrate (See Section "Machining the workpiece")

MDI

��Press the "MDI" key.

The MDI editor is opened.

MDI

��Enter the required commands with the keyboard as G codes.

Cycle Start


The control executes the blocks you have entered.

Delete MDI Progr.

A program created in MDI mode can either be deleted automatically on completion or you can delete it by pressing the "Delete MDI Program" soft key, depending on the machine manufacturer's setting.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. ��

�

2 Setting Up the Machine 06.03 2.9 MDI

2


Notes

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece 3


Machining the Workpiece 3.1 Starting/stopping program execution ........................................................................ 3-90

3.2 Executing a trial program run.................................................................................... 3-93

3.3 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................... 3-94

3.4 Repositioning the axes.............................................................................................. 3-95

3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program ................................................ 3-96

3.6 Controlling the program run .................................................................................... 3-101

3.7 Testing a program................................................................................................... 3-103

3.8 Correcting the program ........................................................................................... 3-104

3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions ....................................................... 3-105

3.10 Simulation of machining.......................................................................................... 3-106 3.10.1 Simulation before machining the workpiece ........................................................... 3-107 3.10.2 Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece ...................................... 3-109 3.10.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece .................................. 3-110 3.10.4 Editing the blank shape for a G code program ....................................................... 3-110 3.10.5 Different views of the workpiece ............................................................................. 3-111 3.10.6 Changing the viewport ............................................................................................ 3-115

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.1 Starting/stopping program execution

3


3.1 Starting/stopping program execution During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in

accordance with the programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is performed automatically.

You must load the program in "Machine Auto" mode, from where you

can start it. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then resume execution later. You can also display the program run in graphic form on the screen.

Once the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, and "Automatic" mode is also activated on the machine control panel, you can start the program whatever your current operating area, even if you are not in "Machine Auto" mode. This start option must be enabled in a machine data code.


The following conditions must be met before a program can be executed: • The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the

machine. • A program created in ShopTurn is available. • The necessary tool offsets and work offsets have been entered. • The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine

manufacturer are activated.

ShopTurn programs created in earlier versions of ShopTurn can also be executed in the current ShopTurn version. Once an old ShopTurn program has been executed in the current version of ShopTurn, it is treated as a program with the current ShopTurn version.

Select a program (whole)

-or- ��Press the "Program" soft key or "Program manager" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

��Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that you want to select.

-or-

��Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.1 Starting/stopping program execution

3


The program overview is displayed.

��Place the cursor on the required program.

Execute

��Press the "Execute" soft key.

ShopTurn switches automatically to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads the program.

Select a program (from program block)

-or- ��Press the "Program" soft key or "Program manager" key.


��Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that you want to select.

-or-



��Place the cursor on the required program.

-or-


The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The process plan of the program is displayed.

��Place the cursor on the program block at which the program run must begin.


ShopTurn automatically switches to the "Machine Auto" mode, loads the program and performs a block search up to the block you have selected (see Section "Starting execution at a specific point in the program").

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.1 Starting/stopping program execution

3


Example of the program view in "Machine Auto" mode

When you select a program for the first time for execution, that con-tains the cycles "Stock removal towards contour" or "Contour pocket", the individual stock removal steps or solid machining steps for the contour pocket are calculated automatically. This process may take several seconds depending on the complexity of the contour.

Start the program

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The program starts and is executed from the beginning or from the selected program block.

Stop the program

Cycle Stop

Press the "Cycle Stop" key.

Machining stops immediately, individual blocks do not finish execu-tion. When the program is started again, machining will resume at the point at which it stopped.

Abort the program

Reset

��Press the "Reset" key.

Execution of the program is interrupted. When it is started again, it will execute from the beginning.

Start program execution from an operating area

The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and "Automatic" mode is activated on the machine control panel.

Cycle Start


The program is started and executed from the beginning. However, the interface of the previously selected operating area remains on the screen.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.2 Executing a trial program run

3


3.2 Executing a trial program run During a trial run of a program, ShopTurn can interrupt machining of

the workpiece after every program block that initiates a movement or auxiliary function at the machine. In this manner, you can check the result of machining one block at a time during the first pass of a program.

The entire machining process is combined in one block during drilling,

and machining operations on one plane are combined in a block during pocket milling. Drilling and pocket machining functions can be broken down into individual blocks using the "Single block fine" function. When this option is selected, machining is also stopped after every individual contour element in a contour.

Single block ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/

stopping program execution").

Single Block

��Press the "Single Block" key.

Cycle Start


The first block of the program is executed. Then execution stops. The text "Stop: Block ended in SBL" is displayed in the channel status line.

Cycle Start


The next block of the program is executed. Then execution stops again.

Single Block

��Press the "Single Block" key when execution block-by-block is no longer required (the key is deactivated again).

If you press the "Cycle Start" key, the program will be executed through to the end without interruption.

Single block fine ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/ Stopping program execution").

Singleblock fine

��Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Single block fine" soft keys to execute each individual drill infeed and each individual pocket milling motion in a separate block.

Single Block

��Press the "Single Block" key.

��Continue as described for "Single Block".

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.3 Displaying the current program block

3


3.3 Displaying the current program block If you want precise information about axis positions and key G func-

tions during a trial run or execution of the program, you can show the basic block display.

You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when

machining the workpiece on the machine. All G code commands that initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block: • Absolute axis positions • G functions for the first G group • Other modal G functions • Other programmed addresses • M functions

The basic block display function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/ Stopping program execution").

Basic block

��Press the "Basic block" soft key.

Single Block

��Press the "Single Block" key if you wish to execute the program block by block.

Cycle Start

��Start program execution.

The precise axis positions, modal G functions, etc., are displayed in the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.4 Repositioning the axes

3


3.4 Repositioning the axes Following a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool

breakage), you can retract the tool from the contour in manual mode. ShopTurn stores the coordinates of the interruption point and displays the differences in distance traveled by the axes in manual mode in the actual value window. This difference in distance is known as the "Repos" offset.

The "Repos" function allows you to reposition the tool on the work-piece contour, in order to resume program execution.

Overtravel past the position of interruption is not possible due to

blocking by the control. The feedrate/rapid traverse override is active.

Caution

During repositioning, the axes traverse at the programmed feedrate and linear interpolation, i.e. along a straight line from the current posi-tion to the point of interruption. For this reason, you must traverse the axes to a safe position beforehand to prevent a collision.

If you do not use the "Repos" function after a program interruption and

subsequently traverse the axes in manual mode, on changeover to automatic mode ShopTurn will traverse the axes and subsequently start processing automatically on a straight line to the point of inter-ruption.

The following conditions must be met for repositioning of the axes: • Program execution has been interrupted by means of "Cycle Stop".• The axes have been moved from the interruption position to

another position in manual mode.

Repos

��Press the "Repos" key.

+X

��Select each axis to be traversed, one at a time, in the appropriate traversing direction.

The axes are moved to the interruption position.

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program

3


3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program If you only want to execute a particular section of a program on the

machine, it is not mandatory to start execution of the program from the beginning, you can also start processing from a specific program block or text string.

The point in the program at which you wish to start machining is called

the "target". ShopTurn distinguishes between 3 different target types: • ShopTurn cycle • Other ShopTurn block or G code block • Any text

For the "Other ShopTurn block or G code block" target type, you can again define the target in 3 different ways: • Position cursor on target block

This is ideal for straightforward programs. • Choose point of interruption

Machining resumes at the point at which it was interrupted earlier. This is especially convenient in large programs with multiple program levels.

• Specify target directly This option is only possible if you know the exact syntax of the target.

Once the target has been specified, ShopTurn calculates the exact starting point for program execution. With "ShopTurn cycle" and "Any text" target types, the calculation is always based on the end of the block. For calculating the start point from all other ShopTurn blocks and G code blocks, you can choose between four different methods.

Calculation methods

1. Calculation to contour: During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations as during execution of the program. The program is executed from the beginning of the target block, just like normal program execu-tion.

2. Calculation to end point: During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations as during execution of the program. The program is executed from the end of the target block or from the next programmed position of the target block.

3. Without calculation ShopTurn does not perform any calculations during block search, i.e. calculation is skipped until the target block is reached.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program

3


The parameters within the control contain the values valid before the block search. This option is only available for programs that exclusively comprise G code blocks.

4. External - without calculation This method is performed in the same way as calculation to end point, except that subroutines called via EXTCALL are skipped in the calculation. In the same way, with G code programs that are executed entirely by external drives (disk drive/network drive), calculation is skipped until the target block is reached. This helps to speed up the calculation process.

Caution Modal functions included in the part of the program that is not calcu-lated are not taken into account for the part of the program to be executed. In other words, with the "Without calculation" and "External – without calculation" methods, you should choose a target block after which all the information needed for machining is included.

Specify target directly With the "Other ShopTurn block or G code block" target type, you can

enter the target directly in the "Search pointer" screen form. Each line of the screen form represents one program level. The actual number of levels in the program depends on the nesting depth of the program. Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all other levels correspond to subroutines. You must enter the target in the line of the screen form corresponding to the program level in which the target is located. For example, if the target is located in the subroutine called directly from the main pro-gram, you must enter the target in program level 2. The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means for example that if the subroutine is called in the main program in two different places, you must also specify a target in program level 1 (main program).

The parameters in the "Search pointer" screen form have the following meaning: Number of program level Program: Program name (the name of the main program is entered automatically) Ext: End of file P: Continuous counter (if part of a program is repeated several times, you can specify the repetition number at which you wish machining to be resumed) Line: Parameter assigned by ShopTurn Type: " " Search target is ignored on this level


3


N no. Block number Marker Jump marker Text Character string Sub-r. Subroutine call Line Line number Search target: Point in the program at which machining is to start

Select ShopTurn cycle

��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Start/Stop the program").

��Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Start search run

��Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" soft keys.

��Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

��Press the "Accept" soft key.

��For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired starting position. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.


Cycle Start


ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

��Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Select other ShopTurn

block or G code block Position cursor on target block


��Position the cursor on the desired target block.

��Press the "Block search" soft key.

To contour ...

External -without cal.

��Select a calculation technique.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.5 Starting execution at a specific point in the program

3


Cycle Start



Cycle Start


The new starting position is approached. The program executes from the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation technique.

Reset


Select point of interruption Program execution must have been interrupted by pressing the

"Reset" key. (ShopTurn automatically remembers this point of interruption.)

��Switch back to "Machine Auto" mode.

Search pointer

��Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" soft keys.

Interrupt point

��Press the "Interrupt point" soft key.

ShopTurn inserts the saved point of interruption as the target.

To contour ...

External - without cal.


Cycle Start



Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.


Reset


Specify target directly ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Start/Stop

the program").

Search pointer

��Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" soft keys.

��Specify the desired target.

To contour ...

External - without cal.


Cycle Start



3



Cycle Start



Reset


Search for any text ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Start/Stop

the program").

Search

��Press the "Block search" and "Search" soft keys.

��Enter the text string that you want to locate.

��Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the program or the current cursor position.

Search

��Press the "Search" soft key.

The program block that contains the text string is marked.

Find next

��Press the "Find next" soft key to continue the search, as necessary.

Start search run

��Press the "Abort" and "Start search run" soft keys.

��Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window and press the "Accept" soft key. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

��For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired starting position and press the "Accept" soft key. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

Cycle Start



Cycle Start


The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset


3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.6 Controlling the program run

3


3.6 Controlling the program run During workpiece machining, if you want to check the result from time

to time, you can stop machining at specified points (programmed stop).

Conversely, if you do not want to execute certain machining steps programmed in G codes on every program run, you can mark these blocks accordingly (skip G code blocks). ShopTurn blocks cannot be selected in this way.

You can also choose to allow DRF offsets, i.e. offsets with the hand-wheel, during machining. This function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


Programmed stop ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/ stopping program execution").

��Press the "Prog. Cntrl." soft key.

Program. stop

��Press the "Program. stop" soft key.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program starts. Program execution stops at every block for which the G code command "M01" was programmed (see Section "Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program").

Cycle Start

��Press the "Cycle Start" key again each time.

Execution of the program is continued.

Program. stop

��Select the "Program. stop" soft key again if you want the program to be executed without a programmed stop (the soft key is deacti-vated again)

Skip G code blocks ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/ stopping program execution").


Skip

��Press the "Skip" soft key.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program starts. G code blocks with the "/" character (slash) in front of the block number are not executed.

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.6 Controlling the program run

3


Skip

��Press the "Skip" soft key again if you want the marked G code blocks to be executed again during the next run (the soft key is deactivated again).

Allow DRF offset ��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/ stopping program execution").


DRF offset

��Press the "DRF offset" soft key.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program starts. Offsets with the handwheel affect the machining process directly.

DRF offset

��Press the "DRF offset" soft key again if you no longer want to allow handwheel offsets during machining (the soft key is deacti-vated again.)

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.7 Testing a program

3


3.7 Testing a program To prevent incorrect machining of the workpiece during the first pass

of the program on the machine, test the program first without moving the machine axes.

During testing of the program, ShopTurn checks for the following

faults: • Geometric incompatibility

• Missing data • Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps • Violation of working area

ShopTurn detects syntax errors automatically when it loads a program in "Machine Auto" mode.

ShopTurn will execute auxiliary functions (M and H functions) during the program test if this has been set by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. The following functions can be used during the program test: • Stop execution with "Programmed Stop" (see Section "Controlling

the program run") • Graphic display on the screen (see Section "Simultaneous

recording before machining the workpiece")

��Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Start/Stop

the program").


Program test

��Press the "Program test" soft key.

Cycle Start


The program is tested without traversing of the machine axes.

Program test

��Press the "Program test" soft key again to deactivate test mode on completion of the program (the soft key is deactivated again).

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.8 Correcting the program

3


3.8 Correcting the program As soon as ShopTurn detects a syntax error while a program is being

loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, it displays the error in the alarm line. You can correct the program in the program editor.

The type of correction that can be made depends on whether the

program is in NC Stop or Reset status following interruption by ShopTurn.

• NC Stop status: You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed on the

machine or read in by the NC. • Reset status:

You can modify any block.

��Press the "Progr. corr." soft key.

The program appears in the "Program" operating area with the block containing the error highlighted.

��Press the "Cursor Right" key.

The parameter screen appears.

��Enter the corrections.


The correction will be loaded into the current program.


The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode again and you can start machining the workpiece.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

3


3.9 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions While the workpiece is being machined, if you want to know, for

example, whether the tool tip radius compensation is currently active or which unit of measurement is being used, you can activate display of the G functions or auxiliary functions.

16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a G

group, only the G function currently active in the NC is displayed. You can also see the currently active transformations in the window header.

As an alternative, all G groups with all associated G functions are listed in "All G functions".

Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the machine manufacturer, which pass parameters to the PLC to trigger reactions defined by the manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. A maximum of five M functions and three H functions are displayed.

Even when a ShopTurn program is executing, you can display the G functions currently active in the NC, because the ShopTurn functions are converted into G code internally.

G

function ��Press the "G function" soft key in "Machine Manual" or "Machine

Auto" mode.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active G functions within a G group will be displayed. If you press the "G Function" soft key again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

-or-

All G functions

��Press the "All G functions" soft key.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, all G groups with G functions are now listed. If you select the "All G functions" soft key again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

-or-

Auxiliary function

��Press the "Auxiliary function" soft key.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active auxiliary functions will be displayed. If you press the "Auxiliary function" soft key again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

3 Machining the Workpiece 06.03 3.10 Simulation of machining

3


3.10 Simulation of machining Execution of the program can be viewed on the screen in graphical

form to enable the result of programming to be checked easily without the need to traverse the machine axes. In this way, you can detect incorrectly programmed machining steps beforehand and prevent faulty machining of the workpiece. You can also use the graphical display to follow machining of the workpiece on the machine when the view of the working area is blocked, for example, by coolant.

In this graphical display, ShopTurn shows the workpiece and the tools

on the screen in the right proportions, i.e. the programmed blank di-mensions in the program header are used and the tools are depicted differently in accordance with their type and size.

In the graphical display of G code programs, ShopTurn displays a pre-defined blank shape that you can change in any way you want.

Finished-part contour If you have programmed turning operations in the main program, ShopTurn shows the corresponding finished-part contour at the start of the graphical display. You can therefore easily compare the actual contour with the finished-part contour and also detect any residual material left behind during machining. This function must be set up using a machine data code.


Display versions You can select from three different versions of the graphical display: • Simulation before machining the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can display execution of the program graphically on the screen at high speed. The machine axes do not move.

• Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can display execution of the program graphically on the screen at dry run feed-rate. The machine axes do not move. In contrast to simulation mode, you are able here to use the program control functions, e.g. you can stop graphical machining or continue one block at a time.

• Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece While the program is executing on the machine, you can follow machining of the workpiece on the screen.

3 06.03 Machining the Workpiece3.10 Simulation of machining

3


Views The following views are available for each of these three modes:

• 3-window view

• Side view

• Front view

• Volume model

The traverse paths for the tools are shown in color: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate

In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the approximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording the clock stops.

In addition, the current axis coordinates and the program block that is currently executing are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also displayed in the simulation.

Counterspindle If during programming you open or close the chuck for the main spindle or counterspindle using M functions, ShopTurn can only dis-play this graphically if these M functions are assigned via machine data cycles.


3.10.1 Simulation before machining the workpiece

Execution of the program can be viewed on the screen in graphical form at high speed to enable the result of programming to be checked easily before the workpiece is machined.

Feedrate override is also active during simulation.

0% = Simulation stops. > 100% = Speed is 100%. Feedrate override must be activated via a machine data code.



3


Start simulation

-or-

��Press the "Program" soft key or "Program manager" key.


��Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that you want to simulate.

-or-



��Place the cursor on the program that you want to simulate.

-or-

��Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

The selected program is displayed in the "Program" operating area.

�� Press the "Simulation" soft key.

Execution of the program will be displayed on the screen in graphical form. The machine axes do not move.

Details

Single Block

��Press the "Details" and "Single Block" soft keys if you wish to execute the program block by block.

Stop simulation

��Press the "Stop" soft key.

Simulation is stopped.

Abort simulation

��Press the "Reset" soft key.

Simulation is aborted and the blank shape of the workpiece is displayed again.

Resume simulation

��Press the "Start" soft key.

Simulation is resumed.

End simulation End

��Press the "End" soft key.

The process plan or programming graphic for the program is dis-played again.


3


3.10.2 Simultaneous recording before machining the workpiece

Execution of the program can be viewed on the screen in graphical form to enable the result of programming to be checked easily before the workpiece is machined.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate

defined in a machine data code to speed up machining. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. You can also interrupt or control graphical machining, i.e. the program

control functions such as "NC stop", "Single block" and "Feedrate override" are active.

You can switch to program view if you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of the graphical display. This function must be set up using a machine data code.



Program test

��Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Program test" soft keys.

Dry run feedrate

��Press the "Dry run feedrate" soft key to replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate.

��Press the "Realsim." soft key.

Cycle Start


Execution of the program will be displayed on the screen in graphical form. The machine axes do not move.

Dry run feedrate

��Press the "Dry run feedrate" soft key again if simultaneous re-cording should take place at the programmed feedrate (the soft key is deactivated again).

Program view

��Press the "Program view" soft key to switch from the graphical display to the program view of the "Machine Auto" mode. Recording of the graphical data continues in the background.


3


...

��Press one of the four soft keys for the graphical views to switch back to the graphical display.

3.10.3 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece

When the view of the working area is blocked, for example, by coolant, you can follow the machining of the workpiece on the screen.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can also activate simultaneous recording of machining when

workpiece machining has already started on the machine.


��Press the "Realsim." soft key.

Cycle Start


Machining of the workpiece is started on the machine and displayed graphically on the screen.

3.10.4 Editing the blank shape for a G code program

Typical G code programs do not contain a definition of the blank shape. For the purposes of graphic display, ShopTurn uses a pre-defined blank shape which you can change in any way you wish.

-or-

��Select "Simulation" or "Realsim.".

Details >

��Press the "Side View" and "Details" soft keys.

Setting

��Press the "Settings" soft key.

��Select the blank shape (cylinder, tube, rectangle or polygon).

��Enter the desired dimensions.

��Press the "Back" soft key.

When a G code program is next displayed graphically, the dimensions you have entered will be applied.


3


3.10.5 Different views of the workpiece

You can switch between different views in the graphical display for a clearer view of machining of the workpiece or to display details or the overall view of the finished workpiece.

The following views are available:

• Side view The display shows the workpiece partly in lengthwise cross-section and partly the surface.

• Front view The workpiece is displayed in cross-section. The end face of the workpiece is displayed by default.

• Volume model The volume model is a three-dimensional view of the workpiece. It does not appear during simulation itself, only when you stop simulation.

The volume model is a software option.

• 3-window view The 3-window view shows a side view and front view, along with a volume model on the PCU 50. The viewport changes synchronous-ly for the side and front views but the viewport for the volume module cannot be changed here. In the volume model only drilling and milling operations are dis-played continuously by ShopTurn; turning operations are only updated when you switch to drilling or milling operations.

You can also reposition the displayed viewport in each view.

If there is no longer enough memory for the graphical view, ShopTurn hides the blank. You can still view the side and front view as a broken- line graphic.


3


Side view

��Press the "Side View" soft key.

Side view

See "Changing the viewport" for more information on how to change the viewport.


3


Front view

��Press the "Front View" soft key.

Front view

Details >

��Press the "Details" soft key to move the cross-section in the Z direction.

-and-

Z Cut + or

��Press the "Z Cut +" soft key or the "Page Up" key to move the cross-section in the positive Z direction.

-or-

Z Cut - or

��Press the "Z Cut -" soft key or the "Page Down" key to move the cross-section in the negative Z direction.



3


Volume model

��Press the "Volume model" soft key.

Volume model

Display volume model

��Press the "Stop" soft key to display the volume model at the current machining point.

��Press the "Side view" and "Start" soft keys to continue with the

simulation.

Change view Details

> ��Press the "Details" soft key to change the view.

-and-

or

��Press the "View �" or "View �" soft key to rotate the workpiece about the X axis.

-or-

��Press the " Rotate View" soft key to rotate the workpiece about the Z axis.

-or-

Cut

��Press the "Cut" soft key to cut the workpiece.

-and-

Cut

��Press the "Cut" soft key again to display the complete volume model.



3


3-window view

��Press the "3-Window View" soft key.

3-window view


3.10.6 Changing the viewport

You can use the zoom or the magnifying glass to move, enlarge or reduce the viewport of the graphical view, e.g. to view details or to display the entire workpiece again afterwards.

With the zoom you can enlarge or reduce the existing viewport from

the center. You can then also move the new viewport. With the magnifying glass, on the other hand, you can first define the viewport itself and then enlarge or reduce it.

The zoom/magnifying glass settings are program-specific, i.e. the settings are saved if you change the viewport and then change to the process plan and back to the graphic, for example. If you then simu-late a new program, ShopTurn uses the default zoom and magnifying glass settings. You can also return to the default view of the workpiece from a changed viewport.

You can also delete the machining lines drawn into the graphic in order to obtain a clearer view, for example.


3


Details >

��Press the "Details" soft key.

Original viewport Back to

original

��Press the "Back to original" soft key to restore the original size of the viewport.

The workpiece on the main spindle or counterspindle is displayed.

Zoom Zoom

+ or +

��Press the "Zoom +" soft key or the "+" key to enlarge the viewport.

-or-

Zoom- or

��Press the "Zoom -" soft key or the "-" key to reduce the viewport.

-or-

��Press a cursor key to move the viewport up, down, left, or right.

The new viewport is displayed.

Magnifying glass Zoom

��Press the "Zoom" soft key.

A magnifying glass in the form of a rectangular frame appears.

��Press a cursor key to move the magnifying glass up, down, left, or right.

Magnifying glass +

��Press the "Magnifying glass +" soft key to enlarge the viewport selected with the magnifying glass.

-or-

Magnifying glass -

��Press the "Magnifying glass -" soft key to reduce the viewport selected with the magnifying glass.

Magnifying glass zoom

��Press the "Magnifying glass zoom" soft key.

The new viewport is displayed.

Delete machining lines

��Press the "Del" key.

The previous machining lines are deleted.

��

�

4 06.03 Creating a ShopTurn Program 4

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edtion 4-117

Creating a ShopTurn Program 4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-118

4.2 Fundamentals ......................................................................................................... 4-120 4.2.1 Machining planes .................................................................................................... 4-120 4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and return ..................................................................... 4-122 4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .................................................................... 4-124 4.2.4 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 4-126 4.2.5 Pocket calculator..................................................................................................... 4-127 4.2.6 Fits........................................................................................................................... 4-129

4.3 ShopTurn program.................................................................................................. 4-130 4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-130 4.3.2 Create new program ............................................................................................... 4-132 4.3.3 Create program blocks............................................................................................ 4-136 4.3.4 Change program blocks.......................................................................................... 4-140 4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-141 4.3.6 Specify number of workpieces ................................................................................ 4-144

4 Creating a ShopTurn Program 06.03 4.1 Program structure

4

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved 4-118 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edtion

4.1 Program structure A ShopTurn program is divided into three sub-areas:

• Program header • Program blocks • End of program These sub-areas form a process plan.

Programheader

Programend

Programblocks

Program structure

Program header

The program header contains parameters that are applicable to the entire program, for example, blank part dimensions or retraction planes.

Program blocks

You specify the individual machining steps in the program blocks. You specify technology data and positions here.

Technology data andpositions

Plain text, e.g. type of machining

Block number allocatedby control

Symbol of machining cycle Program block

Chained program blocks

Technology blocks and contours or positioning blocks are pro-grammed separately for the "Contour turning", "Contour milling", "Milling" and "Drilling" functions. These program blocks are chained together automatically by the control and joined by square brackets in the process plan. In the technology blocks, you specify how and in what form machining should be performed, e.g. first center and then drill. In the positioning blocks, you specify the positions for drilling or milling, e.g. placing the drill holes in a full circle on the end face.

4 06.03 Creating a ShopTurn Program4.1 Program structure

4


Technology blocks

Positioning blocks Technology block and positioning block

Technology blocks

Contours

Contour and technology block

End of program

The end of program signals to the machine that machining of the workpiece has ended. You can also specify the number of workpieces that you wish to machine here.

4 Creating a ShopTurn Program 06.03 4.2 Fundamentals

4


4.2 Fundamentals

4.2.1 Machining planes

A workpiece can be machined on various planes. A machining plane is defined by two coordinate axes in each case. In the case of turning machines with an X, Z and C axis, three planes are available: • Turning • Face • Peripheral surface

Machining planes Face and Peripheral Surface are available only if the CNC-ISO functions "Face machining" (Transmit) and "Cylinder surface transformation" (Tracyl) have been configured.

These functions are a software option.

For turning machines with an additional Y axis, there are two more

planes: • Face Y • Peripheral surface Y The Face and Peripheral Surface planes are then referred to as Face C and Peripheral Surface C.

If the Y axis is an inclined axis (i.e. this axis is not perpendicular to the others), you can also select the machining planes "Face Y" and "Peripheral surface Y" and program the traversing movements in Cartesian coordinates. The control then automatically translates the programmed traversing movements from the Cartesian coordinates system into the traversing movements for the inclined axis. In order to translate the programmed traversing movements, ShopTurn needs the CNC-ISO function "Inclined axis" (Traang).

The function is a software option.

The choice of machining plane is integrated in the parameter screens

for the individual drilling and milling cycles. ShopTurn automatically selects the Turning plane for turning cycles and for "Drill centered" and "Thread centered". For the "Straight" and "Circle" functions, you have to specify the machining plane.

The settings for the machining plane are modally active, that is, until you select another plane.

The machining planes are defined as follows:

4 06.03 Creating a ShopTurn Program4.2 Fundamentals

4


Z

XY

Face

Turning

Peripheral suerface

Machining planes

Turning

The Turning machining plane corresponds to the Z/X plane (G18).

End face/End face C

The Face/Face C machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). In the case of machines without a Y axis, the tools can however only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the X/Y coordinates that you entered into a movement of the X and C axis. You can use end face machining with the C axis for drilling and mill-ing, for example, to mill a pocket on the end face. In this case, you can choose either the front or rear end face.

Peripheral surface/ Peripheral surface C

The Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C machining plane corre-sponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). In the case of machines without a Y axis, the tools can however only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the Y/Z coordinates that you entered into a movement of the C and Z axis. You can use peripheral surface machining with the C axis for drilling and milling, for example, to mill a slot at constant depth on the peripheral surface. In this case, you can choose either the internal or external surface.

Face Y

The Face Y machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). You can use end face machining with the Y axis for drilling and mill-ing, for example, to mill a pocket on the end face. In this case, you can choose either the front or rear end face.

Peripheral surface Y

The Peripheral surface Y machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). You can use peripheral surface machining with the Y axis for drilling and milling, for example, to mill a pocket with a flat floor on the sur-face or to create drilled holes that do not point to the center. In this case, you can choose either the internal or external surface.


4


4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and return

The sequence for approaching to and returning from the machining cycle is always the same if you have not defined a special approach/ return cycle (see Section "Programming the approach/return cycle"). If your machine has a tailstock, you can take this into account as an additional parameter.

Safety distance

Retract plane

Tool change point

Rapid traverseMachining feedrate

Machining cycle approach/return

• The tool travels at rapid traverse in a direct path from the tool change point to the return plane that runs parallel to the machin-ing plane.

• The tool then moves to the safety clearance at rapid traverse. • Machining of the workpiece is then performed at the programmed

machining feedrate. • After machining, the tool is retracted vertically at rapid traverse to

the safety clearance. • The tool then continues to travel vertically at rapid traverse to the

return plane. • From here, the tool travels at rapid traverse across the shortest

path to the tool change point. If the tool does not have to be changed between two machining steps, the tool approaches the next machining cycle from the return plane.

The spindle (main, tool or counterspindle) starts to turn immediately after the tool change.

You define the tool change point, the return plane and the safety clearance in the program header (see Section "Creating a new program").


4


Include tailstock

Safety distance

Retract plane

Tool change point

Rapid traverseMachining feedrate

XR

Approach/return allowing for a tailstock

• The tool travels at rapid traverse in a direct path from the tool change point to the protection plane XR of the tailstock.

• The tool is then fed in at rapid traverse in X direction in the return plane.

• The tool then moves to the safety clearance at rapid traverse. • Machining of the workpiece is then performed at the programmed

machining feedrate. • After machining, the tool is retracted vertically at rapid traverse to

the safety clearance. • The tool then continues to travel vertically at rapid traverse to the

return plane. • The tool then moves in direction X to the protection plane XR of

the tailstock. • From here, the tool travels at rapid traverse across the shortest

path to the tool change point. If the tool does not have to be changed between two machining steps, the tool approaches the next machining cycle from the return plane.

You define the tool change point, the return plane, the safety clearance and the protection zone for the tailstock in the program header (see Section "Creating a new program").


4


4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions

When a ShopTurn program is created, you can enter positions in either absolute or incremental dimensions in accordance with the dimensioning of the workpiece drawing.

You can also mix absolute and incremental dimensions, i.e. by enter-ing one coordinate in absolute dimensions, the other in incremental dimensions.

For the transverse axis (the X axis here), the machine data program-

ming indicates whether the radius or diameter is programmed in absolute or incremental dimensions.


Absolute dimension (ABS)

With an absolute dimension, all position data always refer to the zero point of the active coordinate system.

Z

X

7.515

2535

P4

P3 P2

P1

Ø 2

5 Ø 4

0 Ø 6

0

Absolute dimensions

The positions for points P1 to P4 in absolute dimensions are as follows with reference to the zero point: P1: X25 Z-7.5 P2: X40 Z-15 P3: X40 Z-25 P4: X60 Z-35


4


Incremental dimensions (INC)

In the case of incremental dimensions, positional data references the previously programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to the path to be traversed. The plus/minus sign entered with the incremen-tal value is not normally of any significance. ShopTurn only evaluates the amount of the increment. For certain parameters however, the sign specifies the traversing direction. These exceptional cases are indicated in the parameter tables of the individual functions.

Z

X

7.510

P4

P3 P2

P1

7.510

107.

5

Incremental dimension

The positions for points P1 to P4 in incremental dimensions are as follows: P1: X25 Z-7.5 (with reference to zero point) P2: X15 Z-7.5 (with reference to P1) P3: Z-10 (with reference to P2) P4: X20 Z-10 (with reference to P3)


4


4.2.4 Polar coordinates

Positions can be specified in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordi-nates. If a point in a workpiece drawing is determined by a value for each co-ordinate axis, you can easily enter the position in the parameterization screen form by means of Cartesian coordinates. For workpieces di-mensioned with arcs or angles, it is often easier to enter positions using polar coordinates.

You can only program in polar coordinates with the "Straight/Circle"

and "Contour milling" function. The point of reference for dimensions in polar coordinates is called the

"pole".

Pole

X

Z

P1P2

P3

30

3030

30°30°

30°

Polar coordinates

The positions for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar coordinates are: Pole: X30 Z30 (with reference to zero point) P1: L30 α30° (with reference to the pole) P2: L30 α60° (with reference to the pole) P3: L30 α90° (with reference to the pole)


4


4.2.5 Pocket calculator

You can use the pocket calculator during programming to calculate parameter values. If, for example, the diameter of a workpiece is only indirectly dimensioned in the workpiece drawing, that is the diameter must be obtained by adding a number of other dimensions, you can calculate the diameter directly in the input field for this parameter.

A parameter value is always calculated in the input field for the para-

meter. Any number of calculations can be performed using the follow-ing operations.

• Operators + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication / Division () Brackets MOD Modulo operation AND AND operator OR OR operator NOT NOT operator

• Constants PI 3.14159265358979323846 TRUE 1 FALSE 0

• Functions SIN(x) Sine of x, (x in degrees) COS(x) Cosine of x, (x in degrees) TAN(x) Tangent of x, (x in degrees) ATAN2(x,y) Inverse tangent of x/y, (x and y in degrees) SQRT(x) Square root of x ABS(x) Absolute value of x

Up to 256 characters can be entered in a field.


4


��Place the cursor on an input field in a parameterization screen form.

or

=

��Press the "Insert" or "=" key.

The pocket calculator is active.

��Enter the arithmetic expression. You can use the four arithmetic signs, numbers and decimal points.

or

=

��Press the "Input" or "=" key.

The new value is calculated and displayed in the input field. The pocket calculator is deactivated.

To delete the previous value in an input field first, press the "Backspace" key.

Example: Tool wear +0.1 ��Place the cursor on the input field "∆LengthX" in the tool wear list.


��Enter the arithmetic expression: + 0.1


Example: Calculate diameter

40

160

30

Ø50ØAØ12

0

Workpiece drawing


4


��Place the cursor on input field "X" in a parameterization screen form.


��Enter the arithmetic expression: 30 * 2 + 50


4.2.6 Fits

If you wish to make a workpiece with an exact fit, you can enter the fit dimension directly into the parameterization screen form at the pro-gramming stage.

The fit dimension is specified as follows:

F Diameter/Length Tolerance class Tolerance grade

"F" indicates a fit dimension. You can include any number of spaces between the individual elements.

Example: F 20h7

Possible tolerance classes: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, JS, T, U, V, X, Y, Z, ZA, ZB, ZC Uppercase letter: Drill holes Lowercase letters: Shafts

Possible tolerance grades: 1 to 18, unless limited by DIN standard 7150.

��Place the cursor on an input field in a parameterization screen

form.

��Enter the fit.


The control automatically calculates the mean value from the upper and lower limiting value.

If you want to enter a lowercase letter, highlight the uppercase letter entered with the cursor and press the "Select" key. Press the key again to change it back to an uppercase letter.

4 Creating a ShopTurn Program 06.03 4.3 ShopTurn program

4


4.3 ShopTurn program

4.3.1 Overview

To create a ShopTurn program, the procedure is as follows: • Create a new program

• Assign the program name • Complete program header • Program the individual machining steps

The machining steps listed below can be used.

�

Tool >

Straight >

Circle center >

Circle radius >

Polar >

Approach/Retract >

�

Drilling centric >

Thread centric >

Drilling Reaming >

Deep holedrill >

Thread > �

Tapping

Thread drilling

Positions >

Repeat Position >

�

Solid machin. >

Recess >

Undercut >

Thread >

Cutoff >

4 06.03 Creating a ShopTurn Program4.3 ShopTurn program

4


�

New contour >

Solid machin. >

St. remov.Rest >

Grooving >

Grooving Rest >

Plunge turning >

Plunge tur.Rest >

�

Pocket >

Spigot >

Groove >

Multi-edge >

Engraving

Contour milling > �

New contour >

Path milling >

Predrilling >

Pocket milling

Pocket resid. mat.

Spigot milling

Spigot resid. mat.

�

Set mark >

Repeat >

Sub- program >

Counter- spindle >

Settings >

Transfor- mations > �

Work offset >

Offset >


4


Rotation >

Scaling >

Mirroring >

Rotation C axis

4.3.2 Create new program

A separate program has to be created for each new workpiece that you want to manufacture. The program contains the individual machining steps that must be completed in order to manufacture the workpiece.

When you create a new program, the program header and the end of

the program are automatically defined. The following parameters, which are active throughout the entire program, must be set in the program header.

WO Work offset in which the workpiece zero is stored. You can also delete the default parameter setting if you do not wish to specify a work offset.

Unit of measurement The setting for the unit of measurement (millimeter or inch) in the program header is only applicable to the positional data in the current program. All other data, such as feedrate or tool offsets must be specified in the unit of measurement that you set for the machine as a whole.

Blank

The shape (cylinder, barrel, rectangle or polygon) and dimensions must be specified for the workpiece blank. W: Blank width – rectangle only L: Blank length – rectangle only N: Number of sides – polygon only L: Edge length (alternative to SW) – polygon only SW: Width across flats (alternative to L) – polygon only XA: External diameter (abs.) – cylinder and barrel only XI: Internal diameter (abs. or inc.) – barrel only ZA: Start dimension (abs.) ZI: Finishing dimension (abs. or inc.) ZB: Machining dimensions (abs. or inc.)


4


Cylinder blank

Barrel blank

Retraction

The retraction area defines the area outside which collision-free traversing of the axes must be possible. A return plane is defined for every infeed direction that is only crossed in the infeed direction during positioning. The return planes depend on the shape of the blank and the type of retraction (simple, extended or all). XRA: Outer return plane in the X direction (abs.) XRI: Inner return plane in the X direction (abs. or inc.) ZRA: Outer return plane in the Z direction (abs.) ZRI: Inner return plane in the Z direction (abs. or inc.)

The return planes XRA and XRI are always set in a circular shape around the blank, even for a rectangle and polygon.

Retraction barrel: Simple

Retraction barrel: All

Tailstock

If your machine has a tailstock, you can extend the retraction zone further to prevent collisions between the axes and the tailstock. Input the protection plane XR above the tailstock as an absolute dimension.

Tool change point

The tool turret approaches the tool change point with its zero point and then moves the required tool into the machining position. The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area to ensure that no tool can enter the retraction area when the tool turret rotates. Specify the current tool position as either the tool change point (teach tool change point) or enter the coordinates of the tool change point XT and ZT directly in the parameter screen form. Teaching the tool change point is possible only if you have selected the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).


4


Safety clearance

The safety clearance SC defines how close the tool can approach the workpiece at rapid traverse mode. The safety clearance must be entered in incremental dimensions without a plus/minus sign.

Speed limits

If you want the workpiece to be machined at constant cutting speed, ShopTurn must increase the spindle as soon as the diameter of the workpiece decreases. Since the speed cannot be increased by any amount, you can specify a speed limit for the main spindle (S1) and for the counterspindle (S3) as a function of the shape, size and material of the workpiece or chuck. The machine manufacturer only specifies a speed limit for the machine, i.e. not one that is related to the workpiece.


��Press the "Program" soft key.

��Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

ShopTurn program

��Press the "New" and "ShopTurn program" soft keys.

��Enter a program name. Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically changes lower case to upper case.

-or-

��Press the "OK" soft key or the "Input" key.

The "Program header" parameter screen appears.


4


Work offset

��Select a work offset or enter a work offset directly in the input field or use the "Work offset" soft key to call the work offset list, from which you can select a work offset.

��Enter the other parameters.

Teach TC position

��Select the "Teach TC position" soft key if you want to define the current tool position as a tool change point.

The tool coordinates are transferred to parameters XT and ZT.


The process plan is displayed. ShopTurn has automatically defined the end of the program.


4


4.3.3 Create program blocks

After a new program has been created and the program header has been completed, you can define the individual machining steps that are necessary for manufacturing the workpiece.

An infinite amount of memory is available for one program. You can

program a total of 1000 program blocks with the "Straight line" func-tion. If you use other functions which need more memory, the maxi-mum number of possible program blocks will decrease accordingly.

You can only create program blocks between the program header and the end of the program. The following function groups are available for programming:

• Straight line/circle • Drilling • Turning • Contour turning • Milling • Contour milling • Transformations

For each machining step, you must parameterize a separate screen form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters. The parameters tool, feedrate, speed and machining are explained below:

T (tool)

You have to program a tool for each machining operation on the work-piece. A tool is selected via its name and is already integrated in all parameter screen forms in the machining cycles with the exception of straight line/circle. Tool length compensations take effect immediately the tool is loaded into the spindle. Tool selections are modal with respect to straight line/circle, i.e. for a succession of machining steps using the same tool, you need only program a tool for the 1st straight line/circle.

D (cutting edge)

For tools with several cutting edges, a separate set of tool offset data exists for each cutting edge. With these tools, you must select or specify the number of the edge you wish to use for machining.

Caution

If you specify the wrong cutting edge number and traverse the tool, this may cause a collision in the case of certain tools (e.g. counter-bore with spigot or step drill). It is important to ensure that you always specify the right cutting edge number.


4


Radius compensation

ShopTurn automatically takes account of the tool radius compensa-tion for all machining cycles with the exception of path milling and straight lines. You can work with or without radius compensation for path milling and straight lines. Tool radius compensation acts modally in the case of the straight line machining cycle, therefore you must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation.

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

Radius compensation retains previous setting

F (feed)

The feed F, also known as the machining feedrate, specifies the velocity at which the axes move during processing of the workpiece. The machining feedrate is entered in mm/min, mm/rev or in mm/tooth. The feedrate for milling cycles is automatically converted on switch-over from mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa. Entering the feed in mm/tooth is only possible for milling tools and ensures that every cutting edge of the milling tool machines under the best possible conditions. Feed per tooth corresponds to the linear path traversed by the mill when a tooth is engaged. With milling and turning cycles, the feedrate for roughing always re-fers to the milling tool or cutting edge center point. This also applies to finishing except for contours with inside curvature, where the feedrate refers to the contact point between tool and workpiece.

The maximum feedrate is set via machine data.

Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual.

S (spindle speed)

The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle rotations per minute (rpm) and is programmed in conjunction with a new tool. The speed data apply to the main spindle (S1) or counterspindle (S3) for turning operations and centric drilling and to the tool spindle (S2) for drilling and milling operations. The spindle is started directly after the tool is loaded; the spindle is stopped on a reset, end of program or tool change. The direction of rotation of the spindle is specified for each tool in the tool list.

You can program the cutting rate as an alternative to spindle speed. The spindle speed is automatically converted to cutting rate and vice versa for milling cycles.


4


V (cutting rate) The cutting rate V is a peripheral speed (m/min) and is programmed as an alternative to the spindle speed in conjunction with a tool. The cutting rate applies to the main spindle (V1) or the counterspindle (V3) in the case of turning operations and centric drilling and corresponds to the peripheral speed of the workpiece at the point that is currently being machined. The cutting rate applies to the tool spindle (V2) in the case of drilling and milling operations and corresponds to the peripheral speed at which the cutting edge of the tool is machining the workpiece.

Machining

You can choose between roughing, finishing and complete machining when executing certain cycles. For certain types of milling cycles, edge finishing or base finishing base is also possible. • Roughing

Single or multiple machining operation with depth infeed • Finishing

Single machining operation • Edge finishing

Only the edge of the object is finished • Base finishing

Only the base of the object is finished • Complete machining

Roughing and finishing with the same tool in one machining step If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call.


4


��Position the cursor in the process plan on the line after which the new program block is to be inserted.

...

��Select the desired functions using the soft keys (see the Sections below).

The corresponding parameter screen appears.

��Enter the values for the individual parameters.

��Press the "Help" key to display a help screen for an explanation of a specific parameter.

Tools

��Press the "Tools" soft key to select a tool from the tools list for the parameter "T".

-and- ��Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and- To

Program ��Press the "To Program" soft key.

The selected tool is loaded into the parameterization screen form.


The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed. The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is marked.


4


4.3.4 Change program blocks

You can optimize the parameters in the ShopTurn blocks or adapt them to new situations, e.g. when you want to increase the feedrate or move a position. In this case, you can change all the parameters in every program block directly in the associated parameterization screen form.



��Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that you want to open.

-or-


All the programs in this directory are displayed.

��Select the program that you want to change.

-or-


The process plan of the program is displayed.

��Place the cursor on the desired program block in the process plan.


The parameter screen for the selected program block appears.

��Make the desired changes.

-or-

��Press the "Accept" soft key or the "Cursor left" key.

The changes are accepted in the program.


4


4.3.5 Program editor

You use the program editor when you want to change the sequence of program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy program blocks from one program to another.

The following functions are available in the program editor:

• Mark You can mark several program blocks simultaneously, for example, for cutting and pasting them subsequently.

• Copy/Paste You can copy and paste program blocks within a program or between different programs.

• Cut You can cut and therefore delete program blocks. The program blocks however remain in the buffer, so you can still paste them in somewhere else.

• Search You can search for a specific block number or any character string in a program.

• Rename You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have copied the contour.

• Renumber If you insert a new or copied program block between two existing program blocks, a new block number is automatically assigned by ShopTurn. This block number may be higher than the one in the following block. The "Renumber" function is used to renumber the program blocks in ascending order.


4


Open program editor ��Select a program.


The soft keys for the program editor are displayed in the vertical soft key bar.

Select a program block ��Position the cursor in the process plan on the first or last block you want to select.

Mark

��Press the "Mark" soft key.

��Use the cursor keys to select any further program blocks.

The program blocks are marked.

Copy a program block

��Select the program block(s) in the process plan.

Copy

��Press the "Copy" soft key.

The program blocks are copied into buffer memory.

Cut a program block

��Select the program block(s) in the process plan.

Cut

��Press the "Cut" soft key.

The program blocks are removed from the process plan and stored in buffer memory.

Paste a program block

��Copy or cut the desired program blocks in the process plan.

��Position the cursor on the line after which the program block(s) is (are) to be inserted.

Insert

��Press the "Insert" soft key.

The program blocks are inserted in the process plan of the program.


4


Search

Search >


��Enter a block number or text.

��Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the program or the current cursor position.

Search


ShopTurn searches the program. The cursor highlights the search hit.

Find next


Rename contour

��Place the cursor on a contour in the process plan.

Rename

��Press the "Rename" soft key.

��Enter a new name for the contour.


The name of the contour is changed and displayed in the process plan.

Number program blocks

Renumber

��Press the "Renumber" soft key.

The program blocks are renumbered in ascending order.

Close program editor

��Press the "Back" soft key to close the program editor.


4


4.3.6 Specify number of workpieces

If you wish to produce a particular number of the same workpiece, you can input the required workpiece count at the end of the program. When the program starts, the program run is automatically repeated the number of times you have specified.

If your machine has, for example, a bar loader, you can program

reloading of the workpiece, followed by the actual machining process, at the beginning of the program. You can part the finished workpiece on completion and input the desired workpiece count at the end of the program.

In this way you can implement a fully automatic workpiece production process.

��Open the "End of program" block if you wish to machine more

than 1 workpiece.

��You can also specify the number of workpieces that you wish to machine here.


When you start the program later, the program run is automatically repeated the number of times you have specified.

Endless

If you want to repeat the program run an unlimited number of times, select the "Endless" soft key. You can then cancel the program run again with "Reset".

��

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions 5


ShopTurn Functions 5.1 Linear or circular path motions................................................................................ 5-147

5.1.1 Selecting the tool and the machining plane ............................................................ 5-147 5.1.2 Straight .................................................................................................................... 5-149 5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-150 5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-152 5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-154 5.1.6 Straight polar........................................................................................................... 5-155 5.1.7 Circle polar .............................................................................................................. 5-157

5.2 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 5-158 5.2.1 Drill centered ........................................................................................................... 5-159 5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-161 5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-162 5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-164 5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-166 5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-168 5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns ............................................................................ 5-170 5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-171 5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-173 5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-174 5.2.11 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-176 5.2.12 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-178 5.2.13 Repeat positions ..................................................................................................... 5-180

5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-181 5.3.1 Stock removal cycles .............................................................................................. 5-181 5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-184 5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-187 5.3.4 Thread undercuts .................................................................................................... 5-188 5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-190 5.3.6 Thread re-machining ............................................................................................... 5-194 5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-195

5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-197 5.4.1 Presentation of the contour..................................................................................... 5-199 5.4.2 Creating a new contour ........................................................................................... 5-201 5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-202 5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-207 5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-210 5.4.6 Removal of residual material .................................................................................. 5-214 5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-216 5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-217 5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-219 5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-221

5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-223 5.5.1 Rectangular pocket ................................................................................................. 5-224 5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................ 5-227

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5


5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-230 5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-232 5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-235 5.5.6 Circumferential slot..................................................................................................5-238 5.5.7 Positions ..................................................................................................................5-241 5.5.8 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-242 5.5.9 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-244

5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-248 5.6.1 Presentation of the contour .....................................................................................5-251 5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-253 5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-255 5.6.4 Changing a contour .................................................................................................5-261 5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-264 5.6.6 Predrilling contour pockets......................................................................................5-268 5.6.7 Milling contour pockets (roughing) ..........................................................................5-272 5.6.8 Removing residual material from pocket.................................................................5-274 5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-276 5.6.10 Milling contour spigots (roughing) ...........................................................................5-280 5.6.11 Removing residual material from the spigot............................................................5-282 5.6.12 Finishing the contour spigot ....................................................................................5-284

5.7 Calling a subroutine.................................................................................................5-288

5.8 Repeat program blocks ...........................................................................................5-290

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle ..........................................................................5-292

5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-297

5.11 Calling work offsets .................................................................................................5-298

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-299

5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle .................................................................5-302

5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program.............................................................5-304

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path motions

5


5.1 Linear or circular path motions When you want to perform linear or circular path movements or

machining without defining a complete contour, you can use the functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.

To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:

• Specify the tool and the spindle speed • Select the machining plane • Program the machining • Program any further machining

The following machining options are available: • Line • Circle with known center point • Circle with known radius • Line with polar coordinates • Circle with polar coordinates

If you want to program a line or a circle using polar coordinates, you must define the pole first.

Caution If you use a straight or circular path movement to move the tool into the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

5.1.1 Selecting the tool and the machining plane

Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane.

If you program a sequence of different linear or circular path motions,

the settings for the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane remain active until you change them again.

If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the coordi-nates of the programmed path motion are adjusted automatically to the new machining plane. The originally programmed coordinates remain unchanged only for a linear motion (right-angled, not polar).

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.1 Linear or circular path motions

5


Tool >

��Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Tool" soft keys.

��Enter a tool in parameter field "T".

-or- Tools

��Press the "Tools" soft key and select a tool from the tool list.

-and-

��Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and-

To Program

��Press the "To Program" soft key.

The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.

��Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several cutting edges.

��In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main spindle (S1), tool spindle (S2) or counterspindle (S3).

��Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.

��Choose one of the machining planes (Rotate, End face/End face C, Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, End face Y or Peripheral surface Y).

��Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C.

-or-

��Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you selected machining plane End face Y.

-or-

��Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane Peripheral surface Y.

��Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or whether there should be no change (input field left blank).


The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed. The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is marked.


5


5.1.2 Straight

When you want to program a straight line in Cartesian coordinates, you can use the "Straight" function.

The tool moves across a straight line at the programmed feedrate or

at rapid traverse from its current position to the programmed end position.

Radius compensation Alternatively you can implement the straight line with radius compen-sation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you must de-activate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius compensation only in the first program block.

For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool ap-proaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

Programmedpath

Travel path

Programmedpath

Travel path

First straight line with radius

compensation First straight line with deactivated radius compensation

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first straight line with radius compensation or with deacti-vated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Pro-gramming without coordinate data is not possible.

Straight >

��Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Straight" soft keys.

Rapide traverse

��Press the "Rapid traverse" soft key if you want to use rapid traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.


5



X Z Y C1 C3 Z3

Target position in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of special axis (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm mm mm

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed direction:




The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used

5.1.3 Circle with known center point

To program a circle or arc with a known center point in Cartesian coordinates, use the "Circle center point" function.

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the

programmed target position at the machining feedrate. ShopTurn calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of the entered interpolation parameter settings I and K.

Circle cen-ter point >

��Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle center point" soft keys.


Direction of rotation

Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle end point:

Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

X

Machining plane End face/End face C: Target position in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm


5


Y I J

Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm

Y Z J K

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

X Y I J

Machining plane End face Y: Target position in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

Y Z J K

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc.) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Dist. between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direct. (inc.)The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

X Z I K

Machining plane Rotate: Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.)Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Dist. between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direct. (inc.)The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Dist. between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direct. (inc.)The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm



5


5.1.4 Circle with known radius

To program a circle or arc with a known radius in Cartesian coordinates, use the "Circle radius" function.

The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its

current position to the programmed target position at the machining feedrate. The position of the circle center point is calculated by ShopTurn.

You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise direction. Depending on the direction of rotation, there are two options for approaching the target position from the current position via an arc of the specified radius. You can select the arc of your choice by entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.

+

–

Target

Start

Arc angles of up to 180°: +

Arc angles larger than 180°: –

Arcs with different arc angles

Circle radius >

��Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle radius" soft keys.



Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle end point:



X Y

Machining plane End face/End face C: Target position in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm


5


X Y

Machining plane End face Y: Target position in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Target position in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Z

Machining plane Rotate: Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

R Radius of arc The sign determines the type of arc traversed.

mm



5


5.1.5 Polar coordinates

If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these dimensions as polar coordinates.

Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you must define the pole, i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate system.

Polar >

Pole >

��Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Pole" soft keys.


X Y

Machining plane End face/End face C: X position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Y position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Y

Machining plane End face Y: X position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Y position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Z

Machining plane Rotate: X position of the pole ∅ (abs.) or X position of the pole (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm


5


5.1.6 Straight polar

When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you can use the "Straight polar" function.

A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L

and the angle α. The angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral surface

Reference axis for angle Z X Y

Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the programmed end point at the machining feedrate or at rapid traverse. The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be pro-grammed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Radius compensation Alternatively you can implement the straight line with radius compen-sation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you must de-activate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius compensation only in the first program block.

For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool ap-proaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

Programmedpath

Travel path

Programmedpath

Travel path

First straight line with radius

compensation First straight line with deactivated radius compensation


5


If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can

program the first straight line with radius compensation or with de-activated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

Polar >

Straight polar >

��Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Straight polar" soft keys.

Rapide traverse

��Press the "Rapid traverse" soft key if you want to use rapid traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.


L Distance between the pole and the end point of line mm

α Polar angle (abs. or inc.) The sign specifies the direction.

Degrees


Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed direction:




The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used


5


5.1.7 Circle polar

If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can use the "Circle polar" function.

A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle α. The

angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Turning Face Peripheral surface

Reference axis for angle Z X Y

Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the pro-grammed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate. The radius is obtained from the distance between the current tool position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point posi-tions are at the same distance from the pole. The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be pro-grammed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Polar >

Circle polar >

��Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Circle polar" soft keys.



Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle end point



α Polar angle (abs. or inc.) The sign specifies the direction.

Degrees


5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.2 Drilling

5


5.2 Drilling The functions explained in this section are used when you want to

program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

You program drilling operations in the order in which they are per-

formed. The following technology cycles can be used: • Drill centered • Thread centered • Centering • Drilling • Reaming • Deep hole drilling • Thread tapping • Thread milling

You have to program the positions or position pattern after the technology cycles.

All program blocks involved in the drilling operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Drilling

Clamp spindle In eccentric drilling operations you can choose to clamp the spindle in order to avoid spindle rotation. You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping remains acti-vated only until the drilling operation ends. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" � "Tool" menu.

The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manu-facturer.


5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Drilling

5


5.2.1 Drill centered

The "Drill centered" function is used to make a drill hole in the center of the end face.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal. During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates. You can use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the return plane and safety clearance.

Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.

2. The tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.

3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.

4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Stock removal


2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted at the 1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance calculated by the control system.

3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF and the tool retracts again for stock removal.



If you want, for example, to drill very deep holes, you can also employ a rotating tool spindle. First specify the required tool and tool spindle speed under "Straight/Circle" � "Tool" (see Section "Select tool and machining plane"). Then program the "Drill centered" function.

Drilling centric >

��Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling centric" soft keys.


5


Break chips -or-

Solid machin.

��Press the "Break chips" or "Solid machin." soft key.


T, D, F, S, V See Section "Create program blocks".

Shank Tip

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value programmed for Z1.

Z0 Reference point (abs.) mm

Z1 Insertion depth with reference to Z0 for drill tip or drill shank. (abs. or inc.) mm

D Maximum infeed mm

DF Percentage for each additional infeed DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth Example: DF = 80 Last infeed was 4 mm; 4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm 3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.

%

V1 Minimum infeed Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed. If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with parameter V1. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1

mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.

mm

DT Dwell time for release cut s U

XD Center offset in X direction The center offset can be used for example to produce a drill hole with an exact fit. A rotary drill (rotary drill type) or U drill (drill type) is required. A "normal" drill is not suitable. The maximum center offset is stored in a machine data code.

mm


5


5.2.2 Thread centered

The "Thread centered" function is used to tap a right-hand or left-hand thread in the center of the end face.

During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.

You can alter the spindle speed via the spindle override; feedrate override is not operative.

You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock removal.


1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as far as the final drilling depth Z1.

2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).

2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.

3. The tool is then inserted again as far as the 1st infeed depth at spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Chipbreaking


2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking. 3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or

feedrate V. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling

depth Z1 is reached. 5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool

retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.


5


The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for centered tapping in a machine data code.


Thread centric >

��Press the "Drilling" and "Thread centric" soft keys.


T, D, S, V See Section "Create program blocks".

P Pitch The pitch is determined by the tool used.

mm/rev in/rev Turns /" MODUL-US

1 cut Stock removal Chipbreaking

The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping. The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.


Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm

D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

mm

5.2.3 Drilling and reaming

The "Drilling" and "Reaming" functions are used when you want to program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. Centering

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate

F until it reaches the depth or diameter. 2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to

the safety clearance.

Drilling

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate F until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Reaming

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate F until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at the programmed feedrate to the safety clearance.


5


Drilling reaming >

��Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling reaming" soft keys.

Centering -or-

Drilling

-or- Reaming

��Press the "Centering", "Drilling" or "Reaming" soft key.



FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only) mm/min

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Diameter Shank Tip

The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter of the tool reaches the workpiece surface. The angle of the center drill specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for centering). The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed depth 1. The angle specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for drilling). The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches programmed depth 1 (only for centering and drilling).

∅ Diameter of centering (only for centering – diameter) mm

Z1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

DT Dwell time before retraction to release from cut s U


5


5.2.4 Deep hole drilling

The "Deep hole drilling" function is used when you want to drill deep holes with several infeed steps on the end face or peripheral surface.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.


Chipbreaking


2. The tool is retracted by V2 for chipbreaking and drills up to the next infeed depth.



Stock removal


2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted as far as the 1st infeed depth, reduced by a clearance distance V3.

3. Drilling is then resumed up to the next infeed depth and the tool is then retracted again.

4. Step 3 is repeated until the programmed drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.


Deep hole drilling >

��Press the "Drilling" and "Deep hole drilling" soft keys.


5






Stock removal Chipbreaking

The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Shank Tip

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed depth 1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the programmed depth 1.

Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to Z0. (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to X0. (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

D Maximum infeed mm

DF Percentage for each additional infeed DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth Example: DF = 80 Last infeed was 4 mm; 4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm 3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.

%

V1 Minimum infeed Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed. If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with parameter V1. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1

mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.

mm

V3 Clearance distance (stock removal only) Distance to the last infeed depth to which the drill is inserted at rapid traverse after stock removal. Automatic: The clearance distance is calculated by ShopTurn.

mm

DT Dwell time for release cut s U


5


5.2.5 Tapping

The "Tapping" function is used when you want to tap an internal thread on the end face or peripheral surface.

The spindle speed can be changed with the spindle override during

tapping. The feed override is inoperative during this process.

You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the return plane and safety clearance. With the spindle stationary, the tool moves at rapid traverse to the return plane and then to the safety clearance. Here the spindle begins to rotate and the spindle speed and feedrate are synchronized. The tool continues to move at rapid traverse towards the programmed position.

1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as far as the tapping depth X1 or Z1.

2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Stock removal


2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.

3. Then the tool is inserted again as far as the 1st infeed depth at spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth X1 or Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Chipbreaking


2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking. 3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or

feedrate V. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling

depth X1 or Z1 is reached.


5


5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool re-tracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for tapping in a machine data code.


Thread >

Tapping

��Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Tapping" soft keys.



P Pitch The pitch is determined by the tool used.

MODULUS: Used with endless screws, for example, which extend into a gear wheel.

Turns/": Used with pipe threads, for example. Where values are entered in turns/", enter the whole number before the decimal point in the first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the second and third field. For example, 13.5 turns/" is entered as follows:

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODUL-US



1 cut Stock removal Chipbreaking

The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping. The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for End face/End face C and End face Y)

mm

X1 Tapping depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for Peripheral surface/ Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y)

mm

D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

mm


5


5.2.6 Thread milling

The "Thread milling" function is used when you want to mill an internal or external thread on the end face.

You can mill a right-hand thread or a left-hand thread.

Internal thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the thread center point on the return plane, and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate along a helical path.

3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclock-wise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand thread).

4. The tool is retracted from the workpiece along a helical path at the programmed feedrate.


Please note that when milling an internal thread the tool must not exceed the following value: Milling cutter diameter < (nominal thread diameter ∅ – 2 x thread depth K)

External thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point on the

return plane, and then to the safety clearance. 2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and

then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate along a helical path.

3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclock-wise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand thread).

4. The tool is retracted from the thread along a helical path at the programmed feedrate.


Thread >

Cut thread

��Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Cut thread" soft keys.


5




Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing Finishing

Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also changes the machining direction (climb/conventional). Z0 to Z1: Machining starts at workpiece surface Z0

(only for End face/End face C and End face Y) Z1 to Z0: Machining starts at the thread depth

(only for End face/End face C and End face Y) X0 to X1: Machining starts at workpiece surface X0

(only for Peripheral surface Y) X1 to X0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for Peripheral surface Y)

Internal thread External thread


Left-hand threadRight-hand thread

Left-hand thread Right-hand thread

NT Number of teeth in a milling insert. Single of multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling insert corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end position is reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.

Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for End face/End face C and End face Y) mm

X1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for Peripheral surface Y) mm

∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: nominal thread diameter of M12=12mm mm

P Pitch If the cutter has several teeth, the thread pitch is determined by the tool.

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODUL-US

K Thread depth mm

DXY Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for End face/End face C and End face Y)Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

DYZ Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for Peripheral surface Y) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

U Final machining allowance (for roughing only) mm

α0 Start angle Degrees


5


5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns

The drilling positions must be programmed after you have pro-grammed the drilling technologies (centering, tapping, etc.).

The following position patterns are available:

• Freely programmable positions • Line • Matrix • Full circle • Pitch circle

You can program any number of position patterns in sequence. These will be traversed in the order in which you entered them.

1. The first tool in the program (e.g. centering tool) initially traverses all programmed positions.

2. All programmed positions are then machined with the second programmed tool.

3. This procedure is repeated until each programmed technology has been executed at all programmed positions.

Within a position pattern or on approach from one position pattern to the next, the tool is retracted to the safety clearance, and the new position or position pattern is then approached at rapid traverse.


5


5.2.8 Freely programmable positions

You can use the "Freely programmable positions" function to program any number of positions on the peripheral surface or end face.

ShopTurn approaches the individual positions in the order in which

you enter them. In a program block, you can specify up to 8 positions. To program

other freely programmable positions, you must call the "Freely programmable positions" function again.

Positions >

��Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable Positions" soft keys.

Delete all

��Press the "Delete all" soft key if you want to delete all the programmed positions.



Cartesian/ polar Cartesian/ cylindrical

Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates (only for End face/End face C and End face Y) Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or cylinder coordinates (only for Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C)

mm mm

Z0 CP X0 Y0

X1 ... X7 Y1 ... Y7

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area (only for End face Y) X coordinate for first position (abs.) Y coordinate for first position (abs.)

X coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degrees mm mm

mm mm


5


Z0 CP C0 L0

C1 ... C7 L1 ... L7

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area (only for End face Y) C coordinate for first position (abs.) 1st position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs.)

C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance to position (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degrees Degrees mm

Degrees mm

X0 Y0 Z0

Y1 ...Y7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate for first position (abs.) Z coordinate for first position (abs.)

Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm

mm mm

C0 Z0

C1 ...C7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cylindrical C coordinate for first position (abs.) 1st position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs.)

C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Further positions in the Z axis (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

Degrees mm

Degrees mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0

Y1 ...Y7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate for first position (abs.) Z coordinate for first position (abs.)

Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degrees mm mm

mm mm


5


5.2.9 Line position pattern

The "Line position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie equidistant on a line.

Positions >

��Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix" soft keys.

��Select the "Line" setting in the input field for the "Line/Matrix" parameter.



Z0 X0 Y0 α0

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.

mm mm mm Degrees

X0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.

mm mm mm Degrees

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees


5


X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Line is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Line is rotated in CW direction.


L Position spacing mm

N Number of positions

5.2.10 Matrix position pattern

The "Matrix position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie equidistant on several parallel straight lines.

Positions >

��Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix" soft keys.

��Select the "Matrix" setting in the input field for the "Line/Matrix" parameter.



Z0 X0 Y0 α0 L1 L2 N1 N2

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix in relation to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm


5


X0 Y0 Z0 α0 L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0 L1 L2 N1 N2

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix in relation to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees mm mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees mm mm


5


5.2.11 Full circle position pattern

The "Full circle position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie on a circle with a defined radius.

ShopTurn calculates the distance (angle) between the individual

positions from the number of positions. This distance is always the same.

You can choose whether the tool should approach the next position on a straight line or circular path. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine date code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. If you approach the next position in a straight line in a circumferential groove, a collision may result.

Approach next positionon a straight line

Approach next positionin a circle

Approach positions on a linear or circular path

Positions >

��Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" soft keys.

��Select the "Full circle" setting in the input field for the "Full circle/ Pitch circle" parameter.


5



Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Centered Off-center Z0 X0 Y0 α0 R

End face/End face C: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle

mm mm mm Degrees mm

X0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm mm Degrees

Centered Off-center Z0 CP X0 Y0 C0 L0 α0 R Positioning

End face Y: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in

a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm Degrees mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.



5


R Radius of full circle Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrat defined in a machine data code.

mm

N Number of positions on full circle

5.2.12 Pitch circle position pattern

The "Pitch circle position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie on a pitch circle with a defined radius.

You can specify whether the tool should approach the next position

along a straight line or circular path (for detailed description, see Section "Full circle position pattern").

Positions >

��Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" soft keys.

��Select the "Pitch circle" setting in the input field for the "Full circle/ Pitch circle" parameter.



Centered Off-center Z0 X0 Y0 α0 R

End face/End face C: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius

X0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis.

mm mm Degrees


5


Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

Centered Off-center

Z0 CP X0 Y0 C0 L0 α0 R Positioning

End face Y: Position full circle centered on the end face. Position full circle off-center on the end face.

Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in

a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm Degrees mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 R Positioning

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated in CCW direction. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees mm

α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are approached at this angle. Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.

Degrees

N Number of positions on pitch circle


5


5.2.13 Repeat positions

If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed again, you can do this quickly with the function "Repeat position".

ShopTurn automatically allocates a number for each position pattern

and displays it next to the block number in the process plan.

Position pattern 001

Repeat positionpattern 001

Repeat position pattern

Repeat position >

��Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" soft keys.

��Enter the number of the position pattern that you want to repeat.

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5


5.3 Turning If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a

position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"

function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining plane").

2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the "Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").

3. Program the turning function.

The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining plane.

5.3.1 Stock removal cycles

The stock removal cycles are used to remove stock from corners at external and internal contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing).

Roughing In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the programmed finishing allowance. If no final machining allowance is programmed, the workpiece is roughed down to the final contour.

During roughing, ShopTurn reduces the programmed infeed depth D if necessary to make cuts of an equal size. For example, if the overall infeed depth is 10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1. ShopTurn would reduce the infeed depth to 2.5 to create 4 cuts of equal size.

Whether the tool rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the infeed depth D, to remove residual corners, or is raised immediately, depends on the angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge. The angle above which rounding is performed is stored in a machine data code.


If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised by the safety distance or a value specified in machine data at rapid traverse. ShopTurn always observes the lower value, since otherwise stock removal at inside contours, for example, could cause the contour to be damaged.


5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.3 Turning

5


Finishing Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing. ShopTurn automatically selects and deselects tool radius compensation during finishing.

Longitudinal stock removal from external contour

Paraxial roughing

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse. 3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate. 4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at

rapid traverse (see "Roughing"). 5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next

infeed depth. 6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate. 7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached. 8. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Stock Removal >

��Press the "Turning" and "Stock Removal" soft keys.

��Select one of the three stock removal cycles with the soft key: Simple stock removal cycle straight line -or- Stock removal cycle straight line with radii or chamfers -or- Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers


5




Machining type

Roughing Finishing

Position Roughing position:

Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)

Outside Inside Outside Inside

parallel to X axis (plane)

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs.) mm


X1 End point ∅ (abs.) or end point (inc.) mm

Z1 End point (abs. or inc.) mm

D Infeed depth (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm

UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm

UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm

FSn Chamfer (n=1 to 3) alternative to Rn mm

Rn Radius (n=1 to 3) alternative to FSn mm

Xm-Zm-α1-α2 Select which of the parameters Xm, Zm, α1 and α2 should be displayed – (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Xm Intermediate point ∅ (abs.) or intermediate point (inc.) mm

Zm Intermediate point (abs. or inc.) mm

α1 Angle of first path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Degrees

α2 Angle of second path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Degrees


5


5.3.2 Recessing cycles

Recessing cycles are used when you want to machine symmetrical and asymmetrical grooves on any straight contour element.

Z

X

Inclined recess

You can machine outside and inside recesses in the longitudinal or transverse directions. Use the Recess width and Recess depth parameters to determine the shape of the recess. If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each recess. You can specify a final machining allowance for the recess base and the flanks; the part is then roughed down to this allowance. The hold time between recessing and retraction is stored in a machine data code.


Approach/retraction Roughing (infeed depth D > 0)

D

D

Safety clearance (1)

(3)

(2)(5)

(4)

(7) (6) (8)

D D + safety clearance

D + safety clearance

Machining steps in recessing

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool cuts a recess in the center of infeed depth D (1). 3. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse. 4. The tool cuts a recess next to the first recess of infeed depth

2D (2).


5


5. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse.

6. The tool cuts alternately in the first and second recess by the infeed depth 2D until the final depth T1 is reached (3) and (4). Between the individual recess cuts the tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse. After the last recess cut, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

7. All further recess cuts are made alternately directly down to the final depth T1 (5) to (8). Between the individual recess cuts the tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Finishing 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and

then to the safety clearance. 2. The tool moves at machining feedrate down one flank and along

the bottom to the center. 3. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse. 4. The tool moves at machining feedrate down the other flank and

along the bottom to the center. 5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Recess >

��Press the "Turning" and "Recess" soft keys.

��Select one of the three recess cycles with the soft key: Simple recessing cycle -or- Recessing cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers -or- Recessing on an incline with oblique lines, radii or chamfers


5




Machining type

Roughing Finishing

+ Complete machining

Position Groove position:

Reference point

Reference point:



B1 Recess width, bottom (inc.) mm

B2 Recess width, top (inc.) alternative to B1 – (only for recess with oblique lines and radii)

mm

T1 Recess depth at reference point (abs. or inc.) mm

T2 Recess depth opposite reference point (abs. or inc.) alternative to T1 – (only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

mm

α0 Angle of the incline on which the recess should be machined – (only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers) The angles can be between –180 and +180° Longitudinal recess: α0 = 0° � Parallel to Z axis Face recess: α0 = 0° � Parallel to X axis A positive angle indicates rotation from the X axis to the Z axis.

Degrees

α1, α2 Flank angle (not for simple recess cycle) Asymmetrical recesses can be described by separate flank angles. The angles can be between 0 and < 90°.

Degrees

FS Chamfer (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to R (not for simple recess cycle) mm

R Radius (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to FS (not for simple recess cycle) mm

D Infeed depth for 1st cut (inc.) – (for roughing only) D = 0: 1st cut is made directly to final depth T1 D>0: The 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D for improved chip clearance and avoidance of tool breakage.

1 2

34

5D

T1D

All further cuts are made directly to final depth T1. The lateral infeed for the alternate cuts is determined automatically in the cycle. Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the recess base at one position.

mm

U Final machining allowance (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm

N Number of recesses (N=1....65535)

P Distance between recesses (inc.) P is not displayed when N=1.

mm


5


5.3.3 Undercut form E and F

The "Undercut form E" and "Undercut form F" are used when you want to turn undercuts to DIN509 in form E or form F.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and

then to the safety clearance. 2. The undercut is made in one cut at machining feedrate, starting

from the flank through to the cross-feed V. 3. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.

Undercut form E

Undercut form F

Undercut >

��Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" soft keys.

Undercut form E -or-

Undercut form F

��Press the "Undercut form E" or "Undercut form F" soft key.


5




Position Position of undercut form E:

Position of undercut form F:

Undercut size Undercut size according to DIN table: Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs.) mm

Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs.) mm

X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs.) or allowance in X direction (inc.) mm

Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for undercut form F only) mm

V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs.) or cross-feed X (inc.) mm

5.3.4 Thread undercuts

The "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" functions are used when you want to program thread undercuts to DIN76 for workpieces with metric ISO threads or freely-definable thread undercuts.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and

then to the safety clearance. 2. The first cut is made at machining feedrate starting from the flank

along the shape of the thread undercut as far as the safety clearance.

3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished. 5. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.

During finishing the tool travels as far as cross-feed V.

Thread undercut


5


Undercut >

��Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" soft keys.

Undercut thread DIN -or-

Undercut thread

��Press the "Undercut thread DIN" or "Undercut thread" soft key.



Machining type

Roughing Finishing


Position Position of thread undercut

P Select the pitch from the preset DIN table or enter – (for "Thread undercut DIN" only) mm/rev



X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs.) or Allowance in X direction (inc.) – (for "Thread undercut" only)

mm

Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm

R1,R2 Radius1, Radius2 (inc.) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm

α Plunge angle Degrees

V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs.) or cross-feed X (inc.) mm

D Infeed (inc.) – (for roughing only) mm



5


5.3.5 Thread cutting

The "Longitudinal thread", "Conical thread" and "Face thread" functions are used when you want to cut external or internal threads with constant or variable pitch.

The thread can be single or multiple.

You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle rotation and the feed direction.

The infeed is performed automatically with constant infeed depth or constant cutting cross-section.

• With constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases from cut to cut. The final machining allowance is machined in one cut after roughing. A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at small thread depths.

• With constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure remains constant over all roughing cuts and the infeed depth is reduced.

For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a value calculated from the thread pitch to the thread depth K parameter. You can change this value. The default selection must be activated via a machine data code.


Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves to the return plane at rapid traverse. 2. Thread with advance:

The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position displaced by the thread advance W. Thread with run-in: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position displaced by the thread run-in W2.

3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-out R.

4. Thread with advance: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then to the next starting position. Thread with run-in: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then back to the starting position.

5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished. 6. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.


5


Thread longitudinal

The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position measuring system.

Thread >

��Press the "Turning" and "Thread" soft keys.

Thread long. -or-

Thread cone

-or- Thread face

��Press the "Thread long.", "Thread cone" or "Thread face" soft key.



P Pitch

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODULE

G Pitch change – only for P= mm/rev or inch/rev G = 0 The thread pitch P does not change. G > 0 The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution. G < 0 The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution. If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be programmed can be calculated as follows:

|Pe2

– P2 | G = [mm/rev2] 2*Z1

Key: Pe End pitch of thread [mm/rev] P Start pitch of thread [mm/rev] Z1 Thread length [mm] A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces.

Linear: Degressive:

Infeed with constant cutting depth (for roughing only) Infeed with constant cutting cross-section (for roughing only)

Machining type

Roughing Finishing



5




X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs.) mm

Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs.) mm

X1/Xα Thread incline ∅ (abs. or inc.) – (for conical thread only) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm/degrees

X1 Thread length ∅ (abs.) or thread length (inc.) – (for face thread only) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for longitudinal and conical threads) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

W W2

W2=R

Thread advance (inc.) The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) displaced by the thread advance distance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the individual cuts slightly earlier in order to produce a precise start of thread too. Thread run-in (inc.) The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side but have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft). Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc.)

mm mm

mm

R Thread run-out (inc.) The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).

mm

K Thread depth (inc.) If the value is calculated by ShopTurn, the field is displayed with a gray background. The value can still be changed, however, in which case the field is displayed with a white background again. The programmed final machining allowance U is subtracted from the preset threaddepth K and the remainder is segmented into a number of roughing cuts. The cycle automatically calculates the individual current infeed depths as a function of the specified cut segmentation.

mm

α Infeed slope as angle – alternative to infeed slope as flank α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank α < 0: Infeed along the front flank α = 0: Infeed at right angles to cutting direction If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute value for this parameter must not exceed half the flank angle of the tool.

Degrees

I Infeed slope as flank (inc.) – alternative to infeed slope as angle I > 0: Infeed along the rear flank I < 0: Infeed along the front flank

mm

Infeed along the flank Infeed with alternate flanks (alternative) Instead of infeeding along one flank, you can also infeed along alternate flanks to avoid always loading the same tool cutting edge and increase the tool life. α > 0: Start at rear flank α < 0: Start at front flank

AS Number of roughing cuts or first infeed (for roughing only) The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of roughing cuts and the first infeed.

mm


5



NN Number of noncuts (finishing only) To improve the surface finish the tool moves along the thread depth K a further NN times.

V Return distance (inc.) mm

Q Starting angle offset for single-start threads, i.e. angle that determines the initial cut of the start of thread on the circumference of the turned part (–360°<Q<360°).e.g. Q = 30.0 The initial cut of the thread is at 30°.

Degrees

Multiple thread

The sequence of motions for single and multiple threads is funda-mentally the same.

��Place the cursor on parameter field "Q".

��Press the "Alternat." soft key.

Instead of parameter "Q", the parameters for a multiple thread are displayed.


L Number of threads (max. 6) The threads are distributed evenly across the periphery of the turned part; the first thread is always placed at 0°.

If a multiple thread is to be machined with the first thread not starting at 0°, a cycle must be programmed for each thread and the appropriate starting angle offset must be entered for Q.

A Thread changeover depth (inc.) First machine all threads in sequence to thread change depth A, then machine all threads in sequence to depth 2A, etc., until the final depth is reached. A=0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e. finish machining each thread before starting the next thread.

mm

N 1 of L threads N ≠ 0: only machine thread N N = 0: machine all threads

P Starting thread P = 1 … L only if N=0 If P > 1, the previous threads are not taken into account.


5


5.3.6 Thread re-machining

The "Thread re-machining" function is used if you want to machine a thread again, e.g. if the tool cutting tip breaks while the thread is being cut.

ShopTurn takes into account the angular offset of a thread that occurs

due to reclamping the workpiece.

Jog

��Switch the spindle off.


��Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread groove.

Thread >

��Press the "Turning" and "Thread" soft keys.

Sync. Point

��Press the "Sync. Point" soft key when the thread cutting tool is exactly in the thread groove.


��Enter the value 0 in parameter field "Q" (starting angle offset).


��Move the thread cutting tool back until the reference point (X0, Z0) can be reached without a collision.


��Place the cursor on the thread cutting program block.

Start search run

��Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" soft keys.

Cycle Start



Cycle Start


The new start position is approached and re-machining of the thread starts. The angular offset is taken into account.


5


5.3.7 Parting

The "Parting" function is used when you want to cut off dynamically balanced parts (e.g. screws, bolts or barrels).

You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined

part. You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed of rotation S up to a depth X1, from which point the workpiece is machined at a constant speed. From the depth X1, you can also program a reduced feedrate FR or a reduced speed of rotation SR in order to adapt the velocity to the smaller diameter.

Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with parting. With barrels, for example, you do not need to part right to the center; it is sufficient to part to slightly more than the wall thickness of the barrel.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then to the safety clearance.

2. The chamfer or radius, if applicable, is made at machining feedrate.

3. Parting down to depth X1 is performed at machining feedrate. 4. Parting is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and

reduced speed SR. 5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a drawer to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the workpiece drawer must be enabled in a machine data code.


Part >

��Press the "Turning" and "Part" soft keys.


5




SV Speed limit for constant cutting rate (with V only) rpm



FS Chamfer alternative to R mm

R Radius alternative to FS mm

X1 Depth for feedrate reduction ∅ (abs.) or depth for feedrate reduction (inc.) mm

FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev

SR Reduced speed of rotation rpm

Part drawer Yes: Extend workpiece drawer. No: Do not extend workpiece drawer.

XM Depth to which the drawer must be extended (abs.) mm

X2 Final depth ∅ (abs.) or final depth (inc.) mm

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5


5.4 Contour turning The "Contour turning" function is used when you want to create and

cut complex contours. A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii, undercuts or tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of

the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned elements.

When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank contour which must be entered before the finished part contour. You then choose one of the following machining technologies: • Stock removal • Grooving • Plunge-turning

You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the three technologies above.

For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as follows:

1. Enter unmachined-part contour If you want to base cutting of the contour on a contour of an unmachined part (instead of a cylinder or allowance), you have to define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the finished-part contour. You build up the unmachined-part contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Enter finished-part contour You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

3. Stock removal towards the contour (roughing) The contour is machined in the longitudinal or transverse directions or parallel to the contour.

4. Remove residual material (roughing) During stock removal, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the contour again.

5. Stock removal towards the contour (finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.4 Contour turning

5


All machining steps involved in the contour turning operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Cut a contour

If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"

function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining plane").

2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the "Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").

3. Program the turning function.

The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining plane.


5


5.4.1 Presentation of the contour

ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent

to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Symbol Meaning

Start point Start point of contour

Straight line up Straight line down

Straight line in 90° matrix Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line left Straight line right


Straight line in any direction

Straight line with any gradient

Arc Right Arc Left

Circle Circle

Finish contour END End of contour definition The different color of the symbols indicates their status:

Foreground Background Meaning - Red Cursor on new element Black Red Cursor on current element Black White Normal element Red White Element not currently evaluated

(element will only be evaluated when it is selected with the cursor)


5


Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour elements are being entered.

Graphical presentation of the contour during contour turning

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and colors: • Black: Programmed contour • Orange: Current contour element • Green dashed: Alternative element • Blue dotted: Partially defined element

The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.

The symmetry axis of the contour is represented as a line with dots and dashes.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.


5


5.4.2 Creating a new contour

For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour. You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the start point.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements. In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the same name.

New contour >

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" soft keys.

��Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.


The input form for the start point of the contour appears.



��Enter the individual contour elements (see Section "Create contour elements").


X Start point in X direction ∅ (abs.) mm Z Start point in Z direction (abs.) mm FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start

R: Radius as transition element at contour start FS=0 or R=0: No transition element

mm mm

Transition to contour start

Location of transition element relative to contour start point

Additional command

Any additional command in G code format


5


5.4.3 Creating contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point, you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:

• Vertical line

• Horizontal line

• Diagonal line

• Circle/arc

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters.

If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.

Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.

Contour transition elements

As the transition element between two contour elements, you can se-lect a radius or a chamfer or, in the case of linear contour elements, an undercut. The transition is always appended to the end of a con-tour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameteriza-tion screen form of the contour element.

You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an inter-section between two successive elements which can be calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" con-tour elements.

The contour end is an exception. Although there is no interface to another element, you can still define a radius or a chamfer as a tran-sition element to the blank.


5


Additional commands

You can enter any additional commands in the form of G code for each contour element. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" soft key).

Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a contour:

• Tangent to preceding element You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

• Dialog selection If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.

• Close contour From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.

Create exact contour

transitions The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result, contour transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.

To prevent this you have a choice of two different programming options (using an additional command or programming a special feedrate for the transition element).

• Additional command For the contour illustrated below, first program the vertical straight line and enter the additional command "G9" (Non-modal exact stop) for the parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line.The corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end of the vertical straight line is briefly zero.

G64

G9

Machining direction

Workpiece

Finishing contour edges


5


• Feedrate for transition element If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition ele-ment, enter a reduced feedrate in the "FRC" parameter. The slower machining rate means that the transition element is turned more accurately.

Create contour element

...

��Select a contour element via soft key.

��Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the in-put form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.).


The contour element is added to the contour.

��Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.


The programmed contour is transferred to the process plan.

All parameters

If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements, e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" soft key.

Tangent to preceding

element When entering data for a contour element you can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to prec. elem.

��Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." soft key.

The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the parameter input field.

Select a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different contour options, one of which you have to select.

Select dialog

��Press the "Select dialog" soft key to switch between the two different contour options.

The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

Accept dialog

��Press the "Accept dialog" soft key to accept the chosen alternative.


5


Close the contour A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Close contour

��Press the "Close contour" soft key.

ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the starting point.

Transition element at contour end

When you have created all contour elements, you can still define a transition element to the blank at the end of the contour before you transfer the contour to the process plan.

��Place the cursor on the last contour element.


The associated input screen form opens.

��Enter a transition element.


��Place the cursor on the contour end .


The associated input screen form opens.

��Choose the position you require for the transition element.


A transition element to the blank is added at the end of the contour.

Parameters Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

L Length of line mm

α1 Angle of lead with reference to the Z axis Degrees

α2 Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

Degrees

FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev

Transition to following element

FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element Undercut: Undercut (thread, DIN thread, Form E or Form F) as transition element to the next contour element

mm mm

Z1 Length 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm


5


Z2 Length 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R1 Radius 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R2 Radius 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

T Depth (inc.) – (thread only) mm

P Pitch (for DIN thread only) mm/rev

α Insertion angle (for DIN thread only) Degrees

Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only): Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev

CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm

Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)

Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional command


Parameters Description for contour element "circle" Unit

Direction of rotation Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm

X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

I Position of circle center point in X direction ∅ (abs.) or Position of circle center point in X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

α1 Start angle with reference to Z axis Degrees

α2 Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

Degrees

β1 End angle with reference to Z axis Degrees

β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degrees

FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev


FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element

mm mm

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev

CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm

Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)

Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional command



5


Parameters Description for end of contour Unit

Transition to contour end

Location of transition element relative to contour end point

5.4.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour elements can be • appended, • modified, • inserted or • deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with the same name.

Append a contour

element

��Select the contour in the process plan.


The individual contour elements are listed.

��Position the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...

��Select the required contour element via soft key.

��Enter the parameters in the input screen.


The required contour element is appended to the contour.

Alter a contour element




��Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.


The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the selected element appears in the programming graphic.


5


��Enter the desired changes.


The current values for the contour element are accepted and the change is immediately visible in the programming graphic.

Alter the selected dialog

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.

��Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change selection

��Press the "Change selection" soft key.

The two selection options appear again.

Select dialog


Accept dialog

��Press the "Accept dialog" soft key.

The chosen alternative is accepted.

Insert contour element




��Position the cursor on the contour element after which the new element is to be inserted.

...

��Select a new contour element via soft key.



The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.

When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor. The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.


5


Delete a contour element ��Select the contour in the process plan.



��Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Delete element

��Press the "Delete element" soft key.


The selected contour element is deleted.


5


5.4.5 Stock removal

You can use the "Stock removal" function to machine contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction or parallel to the contour.

Stock removal

Before you can machine the contour, you must enter the contour.

Blank For stock removal, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unma-chined-part contour. You must define an unmachined-part contour as a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part contour.

If the blank and finished-part contours do not intersect, ShopTurn defines the boundary between blank and finished part.

If the angle between the straight line and the Z axis is greater than 1°, the boundary is placed at the top and if the angle is less than or equal to 1°, the boundary is placed at the side.

Finish contour

Blank

Finished part

αα > 1°: Boundary to top

X

Z

Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the top


5


Finish contour

Blank

Finished part

α

α ≤ 1° : Boundary to side

X

Z

Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the side

Alternating cutting depth

Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an alternating cutting depth to vary the load on the tool edge and increase the tool life.

First cut

Second cut

D

D

D - 10%

D - 10%

Alternating cutting depth

The percentage for alternating cutting depth is stored in a machine data code.


Rounding at the contour

You can prevent residual corners after roughing by rounding the contour by the infeed depth D at the end of the cut. When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle between the cutting edge and the contour exceeds a certain value. The angle is set in a machine data code.


Cut segmentation

To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to contour edges, you can align the cut segmentation to the contour edges. During machining the contour is then divided by the edges into individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately for each section.


5


Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected. You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.

Feed interruption

To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machin-ing, you can program a feed interruption. Parameter DI specifies the distance after which the feed interruption should occur. The interruption time or retraction distance is defined in machine data.


Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During contour roughing, parallel cuts of maximum infeed depth are created. Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance pro-grammed.

You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing operations, which allows you to either finish several times (positive allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative allowance). Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.

If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The pro-grammed parameters are retained on the second call. If you want to finish a contour more than once, you must program the machining cycle a corresponding number of times.

Stock removal

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" soft keys.


5




Machining type

Roughing Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: External or internal For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: End face or rear side

Machining direction

Machining direction: ↑ : From inside to outside ↓ : From outside to inside ←: From end face to rear side →: From rear side to end face The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm

DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut

Round contour automatically at end of cut

Equal cut segmentation

Align cut segmentation to edges

Constant cutting depth

Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Allowance Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs – (only for roughing) mm

BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder, allowance or contour (only for roughing)

XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm


Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs.) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs. or inc.) – (with limited machining area only) mm


5


ZA Limit Z (abs.) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs. or inc.) – (with limited machining area only) mm

Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not

FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5.4.6 Removal of residual material

The "Residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after stock removal along the contour.

During stock removal along the contour, ShopTurn automatically de-

tects any residual material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Residual material" function is a software option.

Remove resid.

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "Remove resid." soft keys.



Machining type

Roughing Finishing


Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.

Machining side

Machining side: For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: External or internal For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: End face or rear side

Machining direction

Machining direction: ↑ : From inside to outside ↓ : From outside to inside ←: From end face to rear side →: From rear side to end face The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction.


DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc.) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc.) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm


5


Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut

Round contour automatically at end of cut

Equal cut segmentation

Align cut segmentation to edges

Constant cutting depth

Alternating cutting depth – (only with align cut segmentation to edges)

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc.) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc.) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc.) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Allowance Compensation allowance for contour or not– (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc.) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm




XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not

FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev


5


5.4.7 Grooving

The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.

Grooving

Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.

If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each recess.

Blank For grooving, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cy-linder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour.


If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.

Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machin-ing, you can program a feed interruption.

Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).

For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal" in each case.

Grooving

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving" soft keys.


5




Machining type

Roughing Finishing


Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: End face or rear side


XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc.) – (end face or rear face only) mm

XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc.) – (end face or rear face only) mm


mm





mm




mm


mm







N Number of grooves

5.4.8 Grooving residual material

The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During grooving along the contour, ShopTurn automatically detects

any residual material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Grooving residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.


5


The "Grooving residual material" function is a software option.

Grooving resid.

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving resid." soft keys.



Machining type

Roughing Finishing



Machining side

Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: End face or rear side





mm





mm








N Number of grooves


5


5.4.9 Plunge-turning

The "Plunge-turning" function is used to machine grooves of any shape. In contrast to grooving, the plunge-turning function removes material on the sides after the groove has been machined in order to reduce machining time. Unlike grooving, the plunge-turning function allows you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.

Plunge-turning

You will need a special tool for plunge-turning. Before you program the "Plunge-turning" cycle, you must define the contour.

Blank With plunge-turning, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined

as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour.


If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.

Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machin-ing, you can program a feed interruption.

Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).

For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal" in each case.


5


Plunge-turning

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turning" soft keys.



FX Feed in X direction mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev

Machining type

Roughing Finishing



Machining side

Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: End face or rear side





mm





mm




mm


mm







N Number of grooves


5


5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material

The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During plunge-turning, ShopTurn automatically detects any residual

material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Plunge-turning residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is a software option.

Plunge-turn. resid.

��Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turn. resid." soft keys.



FX Feed in X direction mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev

Machining type

Roughing Finishing



Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: External or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: End face or rear side





mm





mm



5








N Number of grooves

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5


5.5 Milling The functions explained in this section are used when you want to mill

simple geometric shapes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following geometric shapes are available for milling:

• Rectangular pocket • Circular pocket • Rectangular spigot • Circular spigot • Longitudinal slot • Circumferential slot • Multiple edge • Engraving

To mill pockets, spigots or slots at one position only, enter the position in the technology block. If you want to mill these shapes at more than one position, however, you must program the positions or position pattern in a separate block after the technology block.

The technology block and the positioning block are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Milling

Clamp spindle If you wish to insert the tool vertically into the material for milling, for example, you can clamp the spindle in order to avoid spindle rotation. You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatical-ly released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" � "Tool" menu.



5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.5 Milling

5


5.5.1 Rectangular pocket

The "Rectangular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any rectangular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:

• Mill rectangular pocket from solid material. • Predrill rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after another).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the chosen strategy.

3. The pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type from inside out.


Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular pocket as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant which joins the corner radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from inside out.

• Edge finishing Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.

Pocket >

Rectangu-lar pocket

��Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" soft keys.


5





Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing Finishing Finishing the edge

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several rectangular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm


5


CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm

W Pocket width mm

L Pocket length mm

R Radius at pocket corners mm

α0 Angle of rotation of pocket Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees

Insertion

Insertion strategy Helical: Insertion along helical path The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle motion is executed in the plane. Oscillation: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth infeed. Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket. Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the pocket has been predrilled.

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm

EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees


5


FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

5.5.2 Circular pocket

The "Circular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any circular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.


• Mill circular pocket from solid material. • Predrill circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the milling

cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, circular pocket and position program blocks one after another).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.


3. The pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type from inside out.


Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the pocket radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.


Pocket >

Circular pocket

��Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" soft keys.


5






Machining type

Roughing Finishing

Finishing the edge


Mill circular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several circular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).


Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)



Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)



5



Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)

mm mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm


Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs.) Depth of pocket with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (pocket edge) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only)


∅ Diameter of pocket mm Insertion

Insertion strategy Helical: Insertion in a helical path The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle motion is executed in the plane. Feedrate: Machining feed Center: Vertical insertion at center of pocket The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket. Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ Note: Vertical insertion into the pocket center can be used only if the tool can cut across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) mm/rev ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) mm FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion

only) mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min


5


5.5.3 Rectangular spigot

The "Rectangular spigot" function is used when you want to mill various rectangular spigots.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner

radius:

Rectangular spigot

In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also define a blank spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished spigot within the blank.

The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The starting point is on the positive X axis rotated through α0.

2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a semicircle and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavi-gated once. It repeats the process until the spigot depth has been reached.



5


X

Y

Retractingcontour Approaching

contour

Tool

Rectangularspigot

Approaching and retracting from the rectangular spigot in a semicircle

Spigot >

Rectangu-lar spigot

��Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" soft keys.



Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


Machining type

Roughing

Finishing


Mill rectangular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several rectangular spigots in a positioning pattern (full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of spigot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) Finishing allowance in the depth (spigot depth)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm


5


CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of spigot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ UX

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth of spigot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

W Width of finished-part spigot mm L Length of finished-part spigot mm R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm α0 Angle of rotation of spigot

Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees

W1 Width of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm L1 Length of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

5.5.4 Circular spigot

The "Circular spigot" function is used when you want to mill a circular spigot.

In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank

spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished spigot within the blank.

The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.


5


Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The starting point is always on the positive X axis.

2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a semicircle and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavi-gated once. It repeats the process until the spigot depth has been reached.


X

Y

Retractingcontour Approaching

contour

Tool

Circularspigot

Approaching and retracting from the circular

spigot in a semicircle

Spigot >

Circular spigot

��Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Circular spigot" soft keys.



Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


5



Machining type

Roughing

Finishing


Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several circular spigots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of spigot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth)

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of spigot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ UX

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth of spigot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (spigot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

∅ Diameter of finished-part spigot mm ∅ 1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm


5


5.5.5 Longitudinal slot

The "Longitudinal slot" function is used when you want to mill a longitudinal slot on the end face or peripheral surface.


• Mill longitudinal slot from solid material. • Predrill longitudinal slot in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after another).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.


3. The longitudinal slot is always machined with the chosen machin-ing type from inside out.


Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the longitudinal slot as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the corner radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.


Slot >

Long. slot

��Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Long. slot" soft keys.


5




Position Select position: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Edge finishing


Mill longitudinal slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several longitudinal slots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).


Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base)



Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base)



5



Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm


Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base)


W Slot width mm

L Slot length mm

α0 Angle of rotation of slot Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degrees

Insertion Insertion strategy Central: Vertical insertion at center of slot The tool executes the depth infeed vertically in the center of the slot. Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center. Oscillation: Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot: The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane with-out depth infeed.

mm

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degrees


mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min


5


5.5.6 Circumferential slot

The "Circumferential slot" function is used when you want to mill one or more circumferential slots of the same size in a full circle or pitch circle.

Tool size Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to

machine the circumferential slot: • Roughing:

1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Finishing: 1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Edge finishing: Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

Annular slot

To create an annular slot, you must enter the following values for the "Number N" and "Aperture angle α1" parameters: N = 1 α1 = 360°

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the semicircle at the end of the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. It then plunges into the workpiece at machining feedrate, allowing for the maximum Z direction infeed (for face machining) and X direction infeed (for peripheral surface machining) as well as the finishing allowance. The circumferential slot is machined in the programmed machining direction (climb or conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the first circumferential slot is finished, the tool moves to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

4. The next circumferential slot is approached along a straight line or circular path and then machined. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine data code.




5


Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after another from the center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot until depth Z1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth Z1 is reached. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.


Slot >

Circ. slot

��Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Circ. slot" soft keys.



FZ Depth infeed rate mm/toothmm/min

Position You can select 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)


Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Edge finishing

Full circle Pitch circle

Position slots around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and is calculated by the control. Position slots around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined on the basis of angle α2.

X0 Y0

End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.)

mm mm


5


L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge)

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge)

mm Degrees mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge)

Degrees mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth of slot with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane (slot edge)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm mm

W Slot width mm

R Radius of circumferential slot mm

α0 Start angle α0 is based on the end face on the X axis and the peripheral surface on the Y axis

Degrees

α1 Angle of aperture of a slot Degrees

α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degrees

N Number of slots

Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.


5


5.5.7 Positions

If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at more than one position, you must program a separate positioning block.

You must set "Pos. Pattern" for the milling cycle if you want to mill at

more than one position.

Position pattern

You will find further information about freely definable positions or position patterns in the Section "Drilling".

Positions >

��Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" soft keys.

...

��Select the required position pattern via soft key.

��Then proceed as described in the Section "Drilling".


5


5.5.8 Multiple edge

The "Multiple edge" function is used when you want to mill a multiple edge with any number of edges on the end face.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner

radius or chamfer:

Multiple edge

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool traverses the multiple edge in a quadrant at machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The multiple edge is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The multiple edge is traversed again in a quadrant. It repeats the process until the depth of the multiple edge has been reached.


A multiple edge with more than two edges is circumnavigated heli-cally; with a single or double edge, each edge is machined separately.

Y

X

Retractingcontour

Approachingcontour

Tool

Multipleedge

Approaching and retraction from the multiple edge in a quadrant


5


Multiple edge >

��Press the "Milling", and "Multiple edge" soft keys.



Position You can select 3 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Finishing the edge

∅ Diameter of blank part mm


Z1 End point Z1 (abs. or inc.) mm

N Number of edges (1, 2,.....)

SW Across the flats (alternative to L) – (for N = 1 or N = integer only) mm

L Edge length (alternative to SW) mm

α0 Angle of rotation of first edge with reference to X axis α0 > 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CCW direction. α0 < 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CW direction.

Degrees

FS Chamfer (alternative to R) – (for 3 edges or more) mm

R Rounding (alternative to FS) – (for 3 edges or more) mm

DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) mm

DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

UZ Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing and finishing only) mm

UXY Finishing allowance in plane mm


5


5.5.9 Engraving

The "Engraving" function is used when you want to mill a text along a line or arc.

ShopTurn uses a proportional font for engraving, i.e. the width of the

individual characters varies.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool moves to machining depth Z1 or X1 at infeed rate FZ or FX and mills the character.

3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and moves along a straight line to the next character.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.

Mirrored text

Programming engraving in the "End face rear" or "Peripheral surface inner" machining planes produces mirrored text. To obtain normal text here, you must first program mirroring (see "Defining the coordinate transformations") and then the "Engraving" function. Please note that before mirroring you are in the machining plane in which you want to engrave. (To change the machining plane see "Selecting the tool and the machining plane".) To engrave mirrored text in the "End face front" and "Peripheral surface outer" machining planes, first program mirroring and then enter the normal text in the "Engraving" function.

Full circle To distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, there is no need to calculate the arc angle α2 between the first and the last character; instead simply enter α2=360°. ShopTurn then distributes the characters evenly around the full circle.

Engraving

��Press the "Milling" and "Engraving" soft keys.

Lowercase letters Lowercase

��Press the "Lowercase" soft key to enter lowercase letters.

Press it again to enter uppercase letters.


5


Special characters Special

characters ��Press the "Special characters" soft key if you need a character

that does not appear on the input keys.

The "Special characters" window appears.

��Place the cursor on the character you require.


The desired character is inserted in the text.

Delete text Delete

text ��Press the "Delete text" soft key to remove text that has already

been entered.

Delete

��Press the "Delete" soft key.

The entire text is deleted.

The "Lowercase", "Special characters" and "Delete text" soft keys only appear when you place the cursor in the input field for engraving text.



Position You can select 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y and Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Alignment Align text to line

Align text to arc

Align text to arc

Reference point

Position of reference point within text

Engraving text Max. 91 characters

X0 L0 Y0 C0 Z0 Z1 FZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/tooth


5


W DX1 DX2 α1 α2

Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm mm mm Degrees Degrees

Y0 C0 R Z0 α0 X0 X1 FX W DY1 DY2 α1 α2 YM CM ZM

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point (alternative to Y0) – (for linear alignment only) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved align-ment only) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (alternative to YM) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degrees Degrees mm Degrees mm

CP X0 L0 Y0 C0 Z0 Z1 FZ W DX1 DX2 α1 α2

End face Y: Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degrees Degrees

C0 Y0 R Z0 α0 X0 X1 FX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Ref point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Ref. point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate

mm mm mm mm Degrees mm mm mm/min mm/tooth


5


W DY1 DY2 α1 α2 YM ZM

Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm mm mm Degrees Degrees mm mm

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.6 Contour milling

5


5.6 Contour milling The "Contour milling" function is used when you want to mill simple and

complex contours. You can define open contours or closed contours (pockets, islands, spigots) and machine them with path milling or milling cycles.

A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two

and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii or tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned elements.

With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the contour before you program the technology. You have the option of machining contours of any type by path milling, stock removal from pockets with or without islands, or clearing spigots.

Freely-definable contours

The machining of freely-definable open or closed contours is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter contour You build up the contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Path milling (roughing) The contour is machined taking into account various approach and retract strategies.

3. Path milling (finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

Contours for pockets

or islands

Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of the contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that contain one or more islands. The islands can also be located partially outside the pocket or overlap each other. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a pocket contour and all others as islands.

The machining of contour pockets with islands is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter contour for the pocket You build up the contour pocket gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Enter contour for the island You enter the contour for the island after the contour for the pocket. You can program any number of islands which can also be located partially outside the pocket or overlap each other.

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5


3. Centering predrilling of the contour pocket If you want to predrill the contour pocket, you can center the drill hole first to prevent the drill slipping.

4. Predrill contour pocket If you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you can predrill the pocket.

5. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (roughing) The stock is removed from the contour pocket complete with island taking into account various insertion strategies.

6. Remove residual material (roughing) During stock removal from the pocket, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete pocket again.

7. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (finish edge) If you programmed a finishing allowance for the edge when you programmed roughing, the pocket edge will be machined again.

All machining steps involved in the contour milling operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Removing stock from a contour pocket


5


Contours for spigots

Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of the contour are identical. You can define multiple spigots, which can also overlap. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a blank contour and all others as spigots.

The machining of contour spigots is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter the blank contour, i.e. the outer limits of the material The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.

2. Enter contour for the spigot You enter the contour for the spigot after the blank contour.

3. Clear contour spigot (roughing) The contour spigot is cleared.

4. Remove residual material (roughing) As it mills the spigot, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left behind. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete spigot again.

5. Clear contour spigot (edge finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the spigot edge is machined again.

Clamp spindle If you wish to insert the tool vertically into the material for contour milling,

for example, you can clamp the spindle in order to avoid spindle rotation. You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" � "Tool" menu.




5


5.6.1 Presentation of the contour

ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent

to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Symbol Meaning

Start point Start point of contour

Straight line up Straight line down


Straight line left Straight line right


Straight line in any direction

Straight line with any gradient

Arc Right Arc Left

Circle Circle

Finish contour END End of contour definition The different color of the symbols indicates their status:

Foreground Background Meaning – Red Cursor on new element Black Red Cursor on current element Black White Normal element Red White Element not currently evaluated

(element will only be evaluated when it is selected with the cursor)


5


Graphical representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour elements are being entered.

Graphical presentation of the contour during contour milling

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and colors: • Black: Programmed contour • Orange: Current contour element • Green dashed: Alternative element • Blue dotted: Partially defined element

The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.


5


5.6.2 Creating a new contour

For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new contour.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour. You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the start point.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements. In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the same name.

Contourmilling >

New contour >

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "New contour" soft keys.

��Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.


The input form for the start point of the contour appears. You can enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.

Cartesian starting point ��Select the machining plane.

��Enter the starting point for the contour.

��Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.



Polar starting point ��Select the machining plane.

Pole

��Press the "Pole" soft key.

��Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.

��Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.


5


��Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.




Position Select from 4 different positions: • End face/End face C • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C • End face Y (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)

X Y

End face/End face C and End face Y – Cartesian: Start point in X direction (abs.) Start point in Y direction (abs.)

mm mm

X Y L1 ϕ1

End face/End face C and End face Y – Polar: Pole position in X direction (abs.) Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm Degrees

∅ Y Yα Z

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Cartesian: Cylinder surface Start point in Y direction (abs.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Starting angle (abs.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm Degrees mm

∅ Y Z L1 ϕ1

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Polar: Cylinder surface Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Pole position in Z direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm mm Degrees

Y Z

Peripheral surface Y – Cartesian: Start point in Y direction (abs.) Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm

Y Z L1 ϕ1

Peripheral surface Y – Polar: Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Pole position in Z direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm Degrees

Additional command Any additional command in G code format


5


5.6.3 Creating contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point, you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:

• Horizontal line

• Vertical line

• Diagonal line

• Circle/arc

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen form. The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in Cartesian format; however, for the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and polar coordinates. If you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you have already defined a pole for the start point, you can also relate the polar coordinates to this pole. In this case there is therefore no need to define another pole.

Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters.

If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.

Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.

In the case of path milling, the contour is always machined in the programmed direction. By programming the contour in the clockwise direction or counterclockwise direction, you can determine whether the contour is machined with down-cut milling or up-cut milling (see the following table).


5


Outside contour Required direction of

rotation for machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation

Down-cut Programming in clockwise direction CCW cutter radius compensation

Programming in counterclockwise direction, CW cutter radius compensation

Up-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, CW cutter radius compensation

Programming in clockwise direction CCW cutter radius compensation

Inside contour Required direction of

rotation for machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation

Down-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, CCW cutter radius compensation

Programming in clockwise direction CW cutter radius compensation

Up-cut Programming in clockwise direction CW cutter radius compensation

Programming in counterclockwise direction, CCW cutter radius compensation

Contour transition

elements

As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a radius or a chamfer. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameterization screen form of the contour element.

You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two successive elements which can be calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" contour elements.

Additional commands

For each contour element, you can enter any additional commands in G code format, for example, you can program a special feedrate for the circle contour element. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" soft key).

Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a contour: • Tangent to preceding element

You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.• Dialog selection

If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.

• Close contour From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.


5


Create contour elements

…

��Select a contour element via soft key.

��Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.).


The contour element is added to the contour.

��Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.


The programmed contour is transferred to the process plan.

Allparameters

If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements, e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" soft key.

Define pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc

in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.

Continue

Pole

��Press the "Continue" and "Pole" soft keys.

��Enter the coordinates of the pole.


The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and "Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/arc contour elements.

Tangent to preceding element

When entering data for a contour element you can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent toprec. elem.

��Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." soft key.

The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the parameter input field.

Select a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different contour options, one of which you have to select.

Selectdialog


The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.


5


Acceptdialog

��Press the "Accept dialog" soft key to accept the chosen alternative.

Close the contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Continue

Closecontour

��Press the "Continue" and "Close contour" soft keys.

ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the starting point.

Parameters Description for contour element "straight line" Unit

X Y L α1 α2

End face/End face C and End face Y – Cartesian: End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of line Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0


L1 ϕ1 L α1 α2

End face/End face C and End face Y – Polar: abs.: distance between pole and end point inc.: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: polar angle between pole and end point inc.: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of line Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm Degrees Degrees

Y Yα Z L α1 α2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Cartesian: End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees

L1

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar: abs.: distance between pole and end point

mm


5


ϕ1 L α1 α2

inc.: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: polar angle between pole and end point inc.: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm Degrees Degrees mm Degrees Degrees

Y Z L α1 α2

Peripheral surface Y – Cartesian: End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0




mm mm

Additional command Any additional command in G code format

Parameters Description for contour element "circle" Unit

Direction of rotation Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm

X Y I J α1 α2 β1 β2

End face/End face C and End face Y – Cartesian: End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to X axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

L1 ϕ1 L2

End face/End face C and End face Y – Polar: abs.: distance between pole and end point inc.: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: polar angle between pole and end point inc.: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: distance between pole and center of circle inc.: distance between final point and center of circle

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm mm


5


ϕ2 α1 α2 β1 β2

Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: polar angle between pole and center of circle inc.: polar angle between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to X axis Angle of aperture of circle

Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

Y Yα Z J Jα K α1 α2 β1 β2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Cartesian: End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm Degrees mm mm Degrees mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

L1 ϕ1 L2 ϕ2 α1 α2 β1 β2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar: abs.: distance between pole and end point inc.: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: polar angle between pole and end point inc.: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: distance between pole and center of circle inc.: distance between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs.: polar angle between pole and center of circle inc.: polar angle between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm Degrees Degrees mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

Y Z

Peripheral surface Y – Cartesian: End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm


5


J K α1 α2 β1 β2

Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees



mm mm

Additional command


5.6.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour elements can be • Appended • Modified • Inserted • Deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with the same name.

Append a contour

element




��Position the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

…

��Select the required contour element via soft key.



The required contour element is appended to the contour.

Alter a contour element





5


��Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.


The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the selected element appears in the programming graphic.

��Enter the desired changes.


The current values for the contour element are accepted and the change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.

Alter the selected dialog

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.

��Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Changeselection

��Press the "Change selection" soft key.

The two contour options are displayed again.

Selectdialog


Acceptdialog

��Press the "Accept dialog" soft key.

The chosen alternative is accepted.

Insert contour element




��Position the cursor on the contour element after which the new element is to be inserted.

…

��Select a new contour element via soft key.



The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.


5


When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor. The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.

Delete a contour element




��Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Deleteelement

��Press the "Delete element" soft key.


The selected contour element is deleted.


5


5.6.5 Path milling

The "Path milling" function is used when you want to machine open or closed contours. Before you can mill the contour, you must enter the contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for path

milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call.

It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a cutter radius offset and traversing the center path.

Cutter radius compensation

The cutter radius offset allows you to machine a programmed contour to the right or left of the contour. You can choose between different approach and retract modes as well as between different approach and retract strategies.

• Approach/Retract mode You can approach or retract from the contour in a quadrant, semicircle or along a straight line. In the case of a quadrant or semicircle, you have to specify the radius of the cutter center path and for a straight line, the distance from the outer edge of the cutter to the start point or end point of the contour. You can also specify different modes for approach and retraction, for example, approach in quadrant mode and retract in semicircle mode.

Approaching on a straight line, in a quadrant and in a semicircle

• Approach/Retract strategy Approaching in the plane is performed first in the Z direction in the depth and then in the XY plane. Retraction is performed in reverse order. In the case of three-dimensional approach/retraction, traversing is performed simultaneously in the depth and in the plane. You can also specify different strategies for approach and retraction, for example, approach in the plane and retract three-dimensionally.


5


Center path

If you do not want to use cutter radius compensation, the programmed contour is milled on the center path. In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a straight line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for closed contours, for example.

Slot wall offset

When you want to mill a contour on the peripheral surface ("peripheral surface/peripheral surface C" machining plane), you can work with or without a slot wall offset.

• Slot wall offset off ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is equal to the slot width. If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will not be parallel.

• Slot wall offset on ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width is larger than the tool diameter.

If you want to work with a slot wall offset, you must not program the contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt inserted in the slot whereby the bolt touches both walls. The parameter D is used to specify the slot width.

Contourmilling >

Pathmilling >

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Path milling" soft keys.


5





Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is approached vertically for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type Roughing

Finishing

Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the milling cutter machines in the programmed direction:

Machining to the right of the contour

Machining to the left of the contour

Machining along the center path

Z0 Z1 DZ UZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)

mm mm mm mm mm

Slot wall offset D X0 X1 DX UX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Activate slot wall offset Offset to programmed path (only with activated slot wall offset) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)

mm mm mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour)

Degrees mm mm mm mm mm


5


Approach mode Approach mode: In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)In a straight line: Slope in space Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Approach strategy Axis-by-axis

Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular approach mode)

R1 Approach radius (only for quadrant or semicircle approach mode) mm

L1 Approach distance (only for straight-line approach mode) mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)

mm/toothmm/min

Retract mode Retract mode In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)In a straight line: Slope in space Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Retract strategy Axis-by-axis

Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular retraction mode)

R2 Retraction radius (only for quadrant or semicircle retraction mode) mm

L2 Retraction distance (only for straight-line retraction mode) mm

Retraction mode

If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between the separate infeeds (in the transition from the end of the contour to the beginning). • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

• Safety clearance • No retraction


5


5.6.6 Predrilling contour pockets

When removing stock from a contour pocket, if you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you must predrill the pocket first. To prevent the drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.

Before you drill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you

want to center before predrilling, you have to program the two machining steps in separate blocks.

The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend on the specific circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane infeed, finishing allowance) and are calculated by ShopTurn.

If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, predrill all the pockets first and then remove the stock. In this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the para-meters that appear when you press the "All parameters" soft key. Then program as follows:

1. Contour pocket 1 2. Centering 3. Contour pocket 2 4. Centering 5. Contour pocket 1 6. Predrilling 7. Contour pocket 2 8. Predrilling 9. Contour pocket 1 10. Remove stock 11. Contour pocket 2 12. Remove stock

If you machine a pocket completely, i.e. center, predrill and remove stock in immediate succession, and do not complete the additional parameters on centering/predrilling, ShopTurn loads these parameter values from the stock removal (roughing) machining step.

Centering

Contourmilling >

Predrilling >

Centering

��Press the "Milling", "Contour Milling", "Predrilling" and "Centering" soft keys.


5


Allparameters

��Press the "All parameters" soft key if you want to enter additional parameters.

Parameters Description of centering Unit




TR Reference tool for centering

D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm % mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm % mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm % mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm % mm


5


Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points.

• To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0 + safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Predrilling

Contourmilling >

Predrilling >

Predrilling

��Press the "Milling", "Contour Milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling" soft keys in this order.

Allparameters


Parameters Description of predrilling Unit




TR Reference tool for predrilling


Z0 Z1 DXY

UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ

UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm


5


CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth


Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or




5


5.6.7 Milling contour pockets (roughing)

The "Mill pocket" function is used when you want to mill a pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you can program stock removal from the pocket, you must

enter the contour of the pocket and, if applicable, the contour of an island. Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour from the inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings"). If an island is located in the pocket, ShopTurn automatically takes this into account during stock removal.

You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for stock removal. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call. For further details on finishing, please read the Section "Finishing the contour pocket".

Contourmilling >

Pocket milling

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" soft keys.

��Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameters Description for roughing Unit




Machining type

Roughing

Z0 Z1 DXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm mm mm %


5


DZ UXY UZ

Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ

DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degrees mm mm mm % mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth


Start point

X Y

Y Z

Determine start point automatically or enter it manually. Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening without any insertion.

Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

mm mm

mm mm


5


Insertion Insertion strategy: Oscillation: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW). Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed gradient (EP). Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).





mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral

surface Y with central insertion only) mm/toothmm/min

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points. • To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or



5.6.8 Removing residual material from pocket

When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands) and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle motions. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter used

for stock removal.

If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, remove stock from all the pockets first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that appears when you press the "All parameters" soft key. Then program as follows:

1. Contour pocket 1 2. Remove stock 3. Contour pocket 2 4. Remove stock 5. Contour pocket 1


5


6. Remove residual material 7. Contour pocket 2 8. Remove residual material


Contourmilling >

Pocket resid. mat.

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat." soft keys.

Allparameters






Machining type

Roughing

TR Reference tool for residual material


Z0 Z1 DXY

DZ UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm mm


5





C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX



5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket

If you programmed stock removal from the pocket with a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the pocket, you still have to finish the pocket.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and for

finishing the edge. In each case, the pocket will only be machined once. ShopTurn takes into account any islands as was the case for roughing.

You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing". Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows: 1. Contour pocket 2. Contour island 3. Remove stock (roughing) 4. Contour pocket 5. Path milling (finishing) 6. Contour island 7. Path milling (finishing)

Contourmilling >

Pocket milling

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" soft keys.


5


��Select machining mode "Finish base" or "Finish edge".

Parameters Description of finishing the base Unit




Machining type

Finishing the base

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY

UXY UZ




5


C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX



Start point

X Y

Y Z

Determine start point automatically or enter it manually Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening without any insertion.

Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point) Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point) Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point)

mm mm

mm mm

Insertion Insertion strategy: Oscillation: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW). Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed gradient (EP). Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).





mm/toothmm/min


mm/toothmm/min

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points. • To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or




5


Parameters Description of finishing the edge Unit




Machining mode

Finishing the edge

Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or




5


5.6.10 Milling contour spigots (roughing)

The "Mill spigot" function is used when you want to mill a spigot on the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and

then one or more spigot contours. The blank contour defines the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call. For further details on finishing, please read the Section "Finishing the contour spigot".

If you only program a blank contour without a second contour for the spigot, you can face mill the blank contour.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the

height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The start point is calculated by ShopTurn.

2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches the spigot contour from the side in a quadrant at machining feedrate.

3. The spigot is cleared in parallel with the contours from the outside in. The direction is determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").

4. When the first plane of the spigot has been cleared, the tool retracts from the contour in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and cleared in parallel with the contours from outside in.

6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.


Contourmilling >

Spigot milling

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" soft keys.

��Select "Roughing" machining mode.


5


Parameters Description for roughing Unit




Machining type

Roughing

Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm mm




C0 X0 X1 DYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

Degrees mm mm mm %


5


DX UYZ UX

Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points: • To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or


If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

5.6.11 Removing residual material from the spigot

When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle motions. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for clearing.

If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, clear all the spigots first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that appears when you press the "All parameters" soft key. Then program as follows:

1. Contour blank 1 2. Contour spigot 1 3. Clear spigot 1 4. Contour blank 2 5. Contour spigot 2 6. Clear spigot 2 7. Contour blank 1 8. Contour spigot 1 9. Clear residual material spigot 1 10. Contour blank 2 11. Contour spigot 2 12. Clear residual material spigot 2


5



Contourmilling >

Spigot resid. mat.

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat." soft keys.

Allparameters






Machining type

Roughing

TR Reference tool for residual material


Z0 Z1 DXY

DZ UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.)

Degrees mm


5


Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm % mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ

DX UYZ UX



5.6.12 Finishing the contour spigot

If you programmed a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the spigot in spigot milling, you still have to finish the spigot.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and for

finishing the edge. In each case, the spigot will only be machined once.

You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing". Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows: 1. Contour blank 2. Contour spigot 3. Mill spigot (roughing) 4. Contour blank 5. Path milling (finishing) 6. Contour spigot 7. Path milling (finishing)

Contourmilling >

Spigot milling

��Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" soft keys.

��Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.


5


Parameters Description of finishing the base Unit




Machining type

Finishing the base

Z0 Z1 DXY

UXY UZ


mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ

UYZ UX


mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY

UXY UZ



C0 X0 X1 DYZ

UYZ UX




5


Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points. • To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or


If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0),Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Parameters Description of finishing the edge Unit




Machining mode

Finishing the edge

Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degrees mm mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points.


5


• To retraction plane • Z0 + safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0 + safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peri-pheral surface Y only)

If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.7 Calling a subroutine

5


5.7 Calling a subroutine If you require the same machining steps in the programming of

different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a sepa-rate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Identi-cal machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.

ShopTurn does not distinguish between main programs and subrou-

tines, i.e. you can call a "normal" ShopTurn or G code program as a subroutine in another ShopTurn program. In this subroutine, you can also call another subroutine. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subrou-tines. You cannot not insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control.

If you want to call a ShopTurn program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated previously (load or simulate pro-gram in Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code sub-routines.

The subroutine must always be stored in the NC main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", "Sub-routines" directories). If you want to call a subroutine located on an-other drive, you can use G code command "EXTCALL".

Subroutine call"DRILL"

Subroutine call

Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program header of the subroutine, excluding the blank settings, when the sub-routine is called. These settings also remain active even after the sub-routine has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main pro-gram after calling the subroutine (see "Changing program settings").

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.7 Calling a subroutine

5


��Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call as a subroutine in another program.

��Position the cursor in the process plan of the main program on the program block after which the subroutine call is to be inserted.

Sub- routine >

��Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" soft keys.

��Enter the path of the subroutine if the desired subroutine is not

stored in the same directory as the main program.

Directory Path to enter ShopTurn ShopTurn Separate directory XYZ XYZ Part programs MPF Subroutines SPF ��Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert.

You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the sub-routine does not have the file extension specified for the directory in which the subroutine is stored.

Directory Specified file extension ShopTurn *.mpf Separate directory XYZ *.mpf Part programs *.mpf Subroutines *.spf


The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.8 Repeat program blocks

5


5.8 Repeat program blocks If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed

more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once. ShopTurn allows you to repeat program blocks.

You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start

and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999 times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they must have different names.

You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not within chained program blocks.

It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following program blocks.

Start mark

End mark

Repetition

Repeat program blocks

Setmarker >

��Press the "Various" and "Set marker" soft keys.

��Enter a name.


A start marker is inserted behind the current block.

��Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.

Setmarker >

��Press the "Various" and "Set marker" soft keys.

��Enter a name.


An end marker is inserted behind the current block.

��Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat the program blocks.

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.8 Repeat program blocks

5


Repeat >

��Press the "Various" and "Repeat" soft keys.

��Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of times the blocks are to be repeated.


The marked program blocks are repeated.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5


5.9 Machining with the counterspindle If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine work-

pieces using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually. Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle must grip the workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it to the new machining position. You can program these operations with the "Counterspindle" function.

ShopTurn offers the following five programming steps:

• Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle • Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the

counterspindle • Rear face: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the

new machining position • Complete: Gripping, pulling (optionally with parting) and rear face

steps • Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)

If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle machin-ing operation, the counterspindle is first retracted to the return position defined in a machine data code.


Work offsets In the case of the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions, you must speci-fy in which work offset ShopTurn should save the shifted coordinate system; you do not have to specify these work offsets beforehand. In the case of the "Front face" function, however, you must specify the work offset that you want to use.

Caution The work offsets selected in the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions will change even if you only start one block search or simulation. You should therefore not use these work offsets for other purposes at the same time, otherwise problems may arise.

To simplify the programming process, programming suggestions for

three typical applications are provided below: • Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine

counterspindle • Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece) • Machine bars

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5


Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine counterspindle The programming for this operation might look like this:

Alternative 1: 1. Machine main spindle 2. Gripping 3. Pulling 4. Rear face 5. Machine counterspindle

Alternative 2: 1. Machine main spindle 2. Complete (gripping, pulling

and rear face) 3. Machine counterspindle

Gripping ShopTurn first synchronizes the main spindle and counterspindle. The counterspindle then moves towards the workpiece at rapid traverse to programmed position ZR and then continues at reduced feedrate FR to transfer position Z1. Whether it is the front edge or stop edge of the counterspindle that moves up to the position is defined in the "Spindles" screen form (see "Counterspindle settings"). As an alternative, the counterspindle moves to the limit stop as of a particular distance. This distance and the corresponding feedrate are programmed in a machine data code.


Machining on the workpiece rear face is not affected if you specify an angular offset of α1 so as to grip the workpiece better.

Pulling The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out of the main spindle by

amount Z1. ShopTurn shifts the coordinate system accordingly and saves the offset in the selected work offset.

Rear face The counterspindle moves with the workpiece at rapid traverse to the new machining position ZW. The workpiece zero moves too and shifts by ZV (with sign) from the front face to the rear face of the workpiece. The coordinate system is then transposed into a mirror image for machining on the rear face and saved in the selected work offset. Synchronous operation of both spindles is disabled. The counterspindle is now the master spindle.

Machine counterspindle When the rear face is machined, ShopTurn automatically transposes the coordinate system into a mirror image, i.e. you program the machining operation for the rear face as for the front face.

Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece)

The programming might look like this: 1. Rear face


5


WO: Work offset is only activated ZV: Parameter is not calculated.

2. Machine counterspindle

Rear face Please note the following special features of the "Rear face" program step when machining on the counterspindle without first transferring the workpiece. The work offset that you choose in the parameteriza-tion screen form is only activated and not calculated. This means that the workpiece zero for counterspindle machining should be stored in the work offset. In addition, parameter ZV is not calculated.

Machine bars

If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several workpieces on the front and rear face by starting the program just once.

Machining of bars can be programmed as follows, for example: 1. Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece

zero is stored 2. Machine main spindle 3. Complete (gripping, pulling (with Pull blank parameters: Yes;

Parting cycle: Yes), rear face) 4. Parting 5. Machine counterspindle 6. End of program with number of workpieces to be machined

Alternatively you can program the machining of bars as follows: 1. Start marker 2. Machine main spindle 3. Complete (gripping, pulling (with parameters Pull blank: Yes;

Parting cycle: Yes), rear face) 4. Parting 5. Machine counterspindle 6. Front face 7. End marker 8. Repeat from start to end marker

Complete If you program the "Complete" program step, you must enter "Pull blank: Yes" and "Parting cycle: Yes" in the "Pulling" step. Then you can program the "Parting" function. The workpiece is then cut off after it has been gripped or pulled out of the main spindle. You do not need to specify the amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle as this is calculated from the parting cycle parameters. The two program blocks "Complete" and "Parting" are linked in the machining plan.

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5


Front face As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is finished, machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can activate a work offset in the meantime for machining the front face using the "Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that was active before the workpiece was gripped. The main spindle is now the master spindle again.

Counter-spindle >

��Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" soft keys.


Function Select from five different functions: • Gripping • Pulling • Rear face • Front face • Complete

XP ZP Rinse chuck S Direction of rotation

Gripping: Part position of tool in X direction (abs.) Part position of tool in Z direction (abs.) Rinse counterspindle chuck or not Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) Direction of rotation of the main spindle (and counterspindle):



No spindle rotation

mm mm rpm

α1 Z1 ZR FR Limit stop

Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Transfer position (abs.) Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs. or inc.) Reduced feedrate Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as the limit stop. No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Degrees mm mm mm/min

Work offset Z1 F

Pulling: Work offset in which the coordinate system displaced by Z1 must be saved. Amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle (inc.) Feed

mm mm/min

Work offset Z3W ZV

Rear face: Work offset in which the coordinate system shifted to ZW and displayed by ZV must be saved. Machining position for special axis (abs.) Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc., the sign is also evaluated)

mm mm


5


Work offset

Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face

XP ZP

Complete: Part position of tool in X direction (abs.) Part position of tool in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm

Rinse chuck S Direction of rotation

Gripping: Rinse counterspindle chuck or not Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) Direction of rotation of the main spindle (and counterspindle):



No spindle rotation

rpm

α1 Z1 ZR FR Limit stop

Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Transfer position (abs.) Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs. or inc.) Reduced feedrate Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as the limit stop. No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Degrees mm mm mm/min

Pull blank F Parting cycle

Pulling: Yes: Pull blank one blank length (preparation for next workpiece) No: Do not pull blank Feedrate for pulling Yes: The workpiece is parted after it has been pulled out. No: No automatic parting.

mm/min

Work offset Z3W ZV

Rear face: Work offset in which the coordinate system shifted to ZW and displayed by ZV must be saved. Machining position for special axis (abs.) Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc., the sign is also evaluated)

mm mm

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.10 Changing program settings

5


5.10 Changing program settings All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of

the blank shape and the unit of measurement can be changed at any point in the program. It is also possible to change the basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.

The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active

until they are changed. Retraction

If you program a new return plane, it will not be taken into account until after the next tool change.

Machining direction

The machining direction of rotation (down-cut or up-cut) is defined as the direction of movement of the milling tooth with respect to the work-piece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this parameter in conjunction with the direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the exception of path milling. The basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining is pro-grammed with a machine data code.


Down-cut Up-cut

Direction of rotation of machining for milling a pocket on the end face

Settings >

��Press the "Various" and "Settings" soft keys.

��Enter the desired parameters. For a description of the parameters, see Section "Create new program".


The new settings for the program are loaded.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.11 Calling work offsets

5


5.11 Calling work offsets You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.

You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program. The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new blank.

You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section

"Defining work offsets"). You can also view the coordinates of the selected offset here.

Transfor- mation >

Workoffset >

��Press the "Various", "Transformation" and "Work offset" soft keys.

��Select one of the work offsets or the standard offset.

-or-

��Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.

-or-

Workoffset >

��Press the "Work offset" soft key.

The work offset list is displayed.

-and-

��Select a work offset.

-and-

To program

��Press the "To program" soft key.

The work offset is loaded into the parameterization screen form.

To deselect the work offsets, select the standard offset or enter zero in the field.

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5


5.12 Defining coordinate transformations To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate

system. Use this possibility, for example, to rotate the coordinate system.

Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.

You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation. In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate transformations.

• Displacement For each axis, you can program a displacement of the zero point.

New offset

Additive offset

• Rotation You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle. A positive angle corresponds to rotation in the counterclockwise direction.

New rotation Additive rotation

On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems with the coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5


• C axis rotation You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable sub-sequent machining operations to be performed at a particular position on the end face or peripheral surface. The direction of rotation is set in a machine data code.


New C axis rotation

Additive C axis rotation

• Scaling You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then multiplied by this factor.

New scaling

Additive scaling

• Mirroring Furthermore, you can mirror all axes. Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.

New mirroring

Additive mirroring

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5


Transfor-mation >

��Press the "Various" and "Transformation" soft keys.

Offset > ...

Mirroring >

��Select the coordinate transformation using the soft key.

��Select whether you want to program a new or an additive coordinate transformation.

��Enter the desired coordinates.

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle

5


5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle If you wish to reduce the approach to or return from a machining cycle

or solve a complex geometric situation on approach/return, you can create a special cycle. In this case, ShopTurn ignores the standard approach/return strategy provided (see Section "Machining cycle approach and return").

You can insert the approach/return cycle between any ShopTurn

program blocks, but not within chained blocks.

The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance approached after the last machining operation.

If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point. If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of 6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.

If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.

Caution

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.

Approach/Return

��Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Approach/Return" soft keys.


F1 Feedrate for approach to first position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X1 1st position (inc.) or 1st position ∅ (abs.) mm

Z1 2nd position (abs. or inc.) mm

F2 Feedrate for approach to second position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X2 2nd position (inc.) or 2nd position ∅ (abs.) mm

Z2 2nd position (abs. or inc.) mm

F3 Feedrate for approach to third position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle

5


X3 3rd position (inc.) or 3rd position ∅ (abs.) mm

Z3 3rd position (abs. or inc.) mm

Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed and change tool Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last position programmed No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")

D Edge number (not with tool change "no")

F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X4 4th position (inc.) or 4th position ∅ (abs.) mm

Z4 4th position (abs. or inc.) mm

F5 Feedrate for approach to fifth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min



F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min



5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program

5


5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program You can program G code blocks in a ShopTurn program. You can

also insert comments to explain the program.

You will find a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 in:

References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

You cannot insert G code blocks before the program header, after the end of the program or within a chained sequence of program blocks.

ShopTurn does not display G code blocks in the program graphics.

If you want to stop machining of the workpiece at specific points, you should program the G code command "M01" at these points in the process plan (see Section "Controlling the program run").

Caution If you use a G code command to move the tool into the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

��Position the cursor in the process plan of a ShopTurn program on

the program block after which a G code block is to be inserted.


��Enter the G code commands or comments. The comment must always start with a semicolon (;).

The newly created G code block is marked with a "G" in front of the block number in the process plan.

5 06.03 ShopTurn Functions5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program

5


G code block

G code in a ShopTurn program

��

5 ShopTurn Functions 06.03 5.14 Inserting a G code in a ShopTurn program

5


Notes

�

6 06.03 G Code Program 6


G Code Program 6.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 6-308

6.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 6-311

6.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 6-313

6.4 Arithmetic parameters ............................................................................................. 6-316

6 G Code Program 06.03 6.1 Creating a G code program

6


6.1 Creating a G code program If you do not want to program a function using ShopTurn functions,

you can also create a G code program using G code commands within the ShopTurn user interface.

You can program a G code command according to DIN 66025.

Parameter screen forms also provide assistance for programming contours, drilling, turning and milling cycles. G code is generated from the individual forms, which you can recompile back to the screen forms. The measuring cycle support function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.


For a more exact description of G code commands to DIN 66025, and of cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to: References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /BNM/, User Manual Measuring Cycles SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

You can call a context-sensitive help function if you require further information about particular G code commands or cycle parameters on the PCU 50.

For a more detailed description of the online help, please refer to: References: /BAD/, HMI Advanced Operator's Guide SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Create a G code program


��Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

G codeprogram

��Press the "New" and "G code program" soft keys.

��Enter a program name. Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You can use any letters, digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically changes lower case to upper case.

6 06.03 G Code Program6.1 Creating a G code program

6


-or-

��Press the "OK" soft key or the "Input" key.

The G code editor is opened.

��Enter the desired G code commands.

Call a tool Continue

> Tools

��Select the "Continue" and "Tools" soft keys if you want to select a

tool from the tool list.

-and-

��Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and-

Toprogram

��Press the "To program" soft key.

The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor. Text such as the following is displayed at the current cursor position in the G code editor: T="ROUGHING80"

Unlike programming with ShopTurn, when you call the tool, the settings stored in the tool management are not activated auto-matically. You therefore have to program the tool change (M6), the direction of spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle speed (S...) and the coolant (M7/M8) as well as the tool.

Example: ...

T="ROUGHING80" ;Call tool M6 ;Change tool M7 M3 S1=2000 ;Switch on coolant and main spindle ...

Cycle support Contour

... Turning

��Select via a soft key whether you want support in programming

contours, drilling, milling or turning cycles.

Create contour ...

��Select the cycle you want via the soft key.


OK


The cycle is transferred as G code to the editor.

��Position the cursor on a cycle in the G code editor if you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-compile

��Select the "Recompile" soft key.

The parameter screen for the selected cycle appears.

6 G Code Program 06.03 6.1 Creating a G code program

6


Edit

Select the "Edit" soft key if you want to go directly back to the G code editor from a parameter screen form.

Measuring cycle support

��Switch to the extended horizontal soft key bar.

Measure turning -or-

Measure milling

��Press the "Measure turning" or "Measure milling" soft key.

Calibrate meas. cal. ...

��Select the required measuring cycle via the soft key.


OK


The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

��Position the cursor on a measuring cycle in the G code editor to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-compile

��Select the "Recompile" soft key.

The parameter screen for the selected measuring cycle appears.

Edit

Select the "Edit" soft key if you want to go directly back to the G code editor from a parameter screen form.

Online help (PCU 50) ��Place the cursor on a G code command in the G code editor or on

an input field in a cycle support parameter screen form.

��Press the "Help" key.

The appropriate help screen is displayed.

6 06.03 G Code Program6.2 Executing a G code program

6


6.2 Executing a G code program During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in

accordance with the programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is performed automatically. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then resume execution later.

Execution of the program can be simulated graphically on the screen to enable you to check the programming result without moving the machine axes. For more information about simulation, see Section "Simulation".

The following conditions must be met before a program can be

executed: • The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the

machine. • A program created in G code is available. • The necessary tool offsets and work offsets have been entered. • The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine

manufacturer are activated.

When a G code program is executed, the same functions are available as for executing a ShopTurn program (see Section "Execute workpiece").

Simulate a G code

program

-or-


��Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-or-


The program is opened in the G code editor.

��Press the "Simulation" soft key.

Execution of the program will be displayed in full on the screen in graphical form.

Edit

Select the "Edit" soft key if you want to go directly back to the G code editor from the simulation screen.

6 G Code Program 06.03 6.2 Executing a G code program

6


Run a G code program

-or-


-and-

��Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-and-

Execute


-or-

��Press the "Execute" soft key if you are in the "Program" operating area.

ShopTurn switches automatically to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads the G code program.

Cycle Start


Execution of the G code program starts on the machine.

6 06.03 G Code Program6.3 G code editor

6


6.3 G code editor You use the G code editor when you want to change the sequence of

program blocks within a G code program, delete program blocks or copy program blocks from one program to another.

When you want to change G code in a program that you are currently

executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet been executed. These blocks are highlighted.

The following functions are available in the G code editor: • Mark

You can mark any G code. • Copy/Paste

You can copy and paste G code within a program or between different programs.

• Cut You can cut and therefore delete any G code. However, the G code remains in the buffer, so you can still paste it in somewhere else.

• Search/Replace In a G code program, you can search for a specific character string and replace it with a different one.

• To Start/End You can jump easily to the start or end of the G code program.

• Renumber If you insert a new or copied G code block between two existing G code blocks, a new block number is automatically assigned by ShopTurn. This block number may be higher than the one in the following block. The "Renumber" function is used to renumber the G code blocks in ascending order.

The G code editor will be opened automatically if you write or open a

G code program.

Select G code

��Place the cursor at the position in the program where the marking should start.

Mark


��Place the cursor at the position in the program where the marking should end.

The G code is marked.

6 G Code Program 06.03 6.3 G code editor

6


Copy G code

��Select the G code that you want to copy.

Copy


The G code is stored in buffer memory and remains there even on changeover to another program.

Paste G code

��Copy the G code that you want to insert.

Insert


The copied G code is pasted from buffer memory into the text in front of the cursor.

Cut G code

��Select the G code that you want to cut.

Cut


The marked G code is removed and stored in buffer memory.

Find G code

Search


A new vertical soft key menu appears.

��Enter the character string that you want to locate.


The G code program is searched for the character string in the forwards direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the cursor.

Find next


The next character string found is displayed.

6 06.03 G Code Program6.3 G code editor

6


Find and replace G code

Search


A new vertical soft key menu appears.

Search/Replace

��Press the "Search/Replace" soft key.

��Enter the character string that you want to find and the characters that you want to insert in its place.


The G code program is searched for the character string in the forwards direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the cursor.

Replace all

��Press the "Replace all" soft key if you want to replace the character string throughout the entire G code program.

-or-

Find next

��Press the "Find next" soft key if you want to continue the search without replacing the instance of the character string found.

-or-

Replace

��Press the "Replace" soft key if you want to replace the character string at this point in the G code program.

Jump to start/end

Continue >

ToStart

ToEnd

��Select the "Continue" and "To Start" or "To End" soft keys.

The beginning or end of the G code program is displayed.

Renumber the G code blocks

Continue >

Renumber >

��Select the "Continue" and "Renumber" soft keys.

��Enter the number of the first block and the increment between block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).


The blocks are renumbered. You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 for the increment or block number.

6 G Code Program 06.03 6.4 Arithmetic parameters

6


6.4 Arithmetic parameters Arithmetic parameters (variables) are variables that you can use

within a G code program. G code programs can read and write the variables. You can assign a value in the R parameter list to variables that can be read.

Input and deletion of variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.

Display R variables

-or-

��Press the "Tools WOs" soft key or the "Offset" key.

��Press the "R vari." soft key.

The variable list is opened.

Finding R variables

Search


��Enter the parameter number you want to find.


The parameter is displayed.

Editing R variables

��Place the cursor on the input field of the parameter that you want to change.

��Enter the new value.

The new value of the parameters is accepted immediately.

Deleting R variables

��Place the cursor on the input field of the parameter whose value you want to delete.

��Press the "Backspace" key.

The value of the parameter is deleted.

��

�

7 06.03 Tool Management 7


Tool Management 7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine ............................................................... 7-318

7.2 Entering tools in the tool list .................................................................................... 7-323 7.2.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................. 7-323 7.2.2 Set up more than one edge for each tool ............................................................... 7-324 7.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................... 7-325

7.3 Sort tools ................................................................................................................. 7-326

7.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ................................................................................ 7-326

7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ................................................. 7-327

7.6 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 7-329

7.7 Entering tool wear data ........................................................................................... 7-331

7.8 Activating tool monitoring........................................................................................ 7-332

7.9 Managing magazine locations ................................................................................ 7-334

7 Tool Management 06.03 7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

7


7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and

technology data for these tools must be available to ShopTurn before you can execute a program (see Section "Setting up the machine"). ShopTurn provides the "Tool list", "Tool wear list" and "Magazine list" screen forms for managing your tools, enabling you to manage tools that are not in the turret (magazine). The various lists may have been changed by the machine manu-facturer so that they are no longer identical to the lists described below.


Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be assigned to specific magazine locations. You can also sort or delete tools here.

Tool list

Loc. Location number in the magazine

The location number of the tool in the machining position in the turret is displayed with a gray background.

If you are working with more than one magazine, you will see the magazine number here first followed by the location number within the magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently in a magazine are listed without a location number (these tools can be found at the end of the tool list when the list is sorted according to magazine location number).

7 06.03 Tool Management7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

7


With chain and plate magazines, the locations for a spindle and a double gripper can also be displayed.


Spindle location

Locations for grippers 1 and 2

Type Tool type and tool point direction You can change the tool point direction of the tool with the "Alternat." soft key.

Tool name A tool is identified by its name. The tool name can be entered as a text string or number.

DP Duplo number of the replacement tool (DP 1 = Original tool, DP 2 = First replacement tool, DP 3 = Second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data A detailed description of the tool offset data can be found in Section

"Setting up the machine" (Subsection "Tools").

(D No.) edge The tool offset data listed here are applicable to currently selected edge of a tool.

Length X Tool length compensation in the X direction

Length Z Tool length compensation in the Z direction

Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool You can also enter the radius or diameter for milling cutters and drills, but only the tool radius for turning tools. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.


Direction of motion for holder angle

Holder angle of a cutting tool The holder angle is taken into account during relief cutting.

Holder angle of a cutting tool The cutting tip angle is taken into account during relief cutting.

Pitch Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev or turns/"

Bore ∅ Diameter of bore for a rotary drill

Tip. width Tip width of grooving tool ShopTurn needs the tip width to calculate the grooving cycles.


7


Tip. length Tip length of a cutting or grooving tool ShopTurn needs the tip length to display tools when simulating the program run.

N Angle of teeth for a milling cutter The control system calculates the revolutional feedrate F internally from this if the feed is set in mm/tooth in the program.

Angle of tool tip on a drilling machine If you want to insert a drill down to the shank, and not just to the tool tip, the control will need the angle of the drill tip.

Tool-specific data

Specification of direction of spindle rotation The direction of spindle rotation applies to the tool spindle in the case of driven tools (drill and milling tool), and to the main spindle or counterspindle in the case of turning tools.

If you are using a drill or milling tool for "Drill centered" or "Thread centered", the specified direction of rotation thus refers to the cutting direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates in the same direction as the tool.

Clockwise spindle rotation

Counterclockwise spindle rotation

Spindle not activated

Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) ON/OFF when this tool is used

Coolant on

Coolant off Please not that some machines are not equipped with a coolant

supply.


Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list. ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece. You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or identify them as oversize.

7 06.03 Tool Management7.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

7


Tool wear list

Loc., type, tool name, DP

Indicates the magazine location number, tool type and tool point direction, text/number ID for the tool and duplo number

(D No.) edge The wear data displayed are the data for the selected tool edge.

∆ Length X Wear in the X direction

∆ Length Z Wear in the Z direction

∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ Wear on the radius or diameter

TC Tool monitoring based on tool life (T), workpiece count (C) or wear (W)

Prewarning limit Prewarning limit for tool life, workpiece count or wear

Tool life Count Wear

Life of tool Number of workpieces machined Maximum permissible wear on tool

Tool status (last two columns)

If the tool is disabled for machining (G) or oversize (U).


7


Tool magazine In the magazine list, you can enable or disable individual magazine locations.

Magazine list

Loc., type, tool name, DP

Indicates the magazine location number, tool type and tool point direction, text/number ID for the tool and duplo number

Location disable Disable the magazine location

Tool status Indicates the tool status specified in the tool wear list

7 06.03 Tool Management7.2 Entering tools in the tool list

7


7.2 Entering tools in the tool list You can enter tools and the associated offset data directly in the tool

list, or you can simply import existing tool data outside the tool management system (see Section "Back-up/import tool or zero point data").

7.2.1 Creating a new tool

When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of generally available tool types. The tool type determines what geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.

Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.

��Install the new tool in the tool turret.


��Place the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in the tool turret. The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New >tool

��Press the "New tool" soft key.

Roughingtool ...

3D_Probe

��Select the desired tool type and the tool point direction with the soft keys. Additional tool types and tool point directions can be called up by pressing the "Further" soft key.

7 Tool Management 06.03 7.2 Entering tools in the tool list

7


The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the selected tool type.

��Enter a unique tool name. You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").


-or- If you want to change the tool point direction subsequently, place the cursor in the "Type" column and select one of the following options with the "Alternative" soft key or the "Select" key.

7.2.2 Set up more than one edge for each tool

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of 9 edges for each tool.

Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one

edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.

Cutting edges >

Newedge

��Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" soft keys.

Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.

��Select another tool point direction if appropriate.

��Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.

��Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.

Deleteedge

��Select the "Delete edge" soft key if you want to delete the tool edge offset data for an edge. You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge number.

D No. +

D No. –

By selecting soft key "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset data for the edge with the next higher or next lower edge number respectively.

7 06.03 Tool Management7.2 Entering tools in the tool list

7


7.2.3 Creating a replacement tool

A replacement tool is one that can be employed to perform the same machining operation as a tool that has already been entered. You can use it, for example, to replace a broken tool.

For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools. The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools.

New >

tool ��Create the replacement tool as a new tool

(see Section "Creating a new tool").

��Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.

The replacement tool is automatically assigned duplo number 2.


7 Tool Management 06.03 7.3 Sort tools

7


7.3 Sort tools When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it

is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.

-or-

��Select the "Tool list" or "Tool wear" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Sort >

��Press the "Sort" soft key.

Tomagazine -or-

To name

-or- To type

��Activate one of the soft keys to choose the sort criteria.

The tools are listed in the new order.

7.4 Deleting tools from the tool list Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a

clearer overview.


��Position the cursor on the tool that you want to delete.

Delete tool

Delete

��Press the "Delete tool" soft key.

��Press the "Delete" soft key.

The tool data of the selected tool are deleted and the magazine location is released again.

7 06.03 Tool Management7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

7


7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at

present. ShopTurn then automatically saves the tool data in the tool list outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding maga-zine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be entered more than once.

Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations

must be enabled in a machine data code.


When you are loading a tool, ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an empty location first is stored in a machine data code.


You can also specify an empty magazine location directly when loading a tool, or define the magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.

If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also load or unload a tool directly into or out of the spindle.


Load a tool into the magazine


��Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will find it at the end of the tool list).

Load

��Press the "Load" soft key.

The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

��Press the "OK" soft key to load the tool into the suggested location.

-or-

7 Tool Management 06.03 7.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

7


��Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" soft key.

-or-

Spindle

��Press the "Spindle" and "OK" soft keys to load a tool into the spindle.

The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.

Find an empty location in the magazine and load the tool


��Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine.

Load

��Press the "Load" soft key.


��Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

��Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.


An empty location is suggested.


The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.

Unload an individual tool

from the magazine


��Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.

Unload

��Press the "Unload" soft key.

The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

7 06.03 Tool Management7.6 Relocating a tool

7


Unload all tools from the magazine

��Select the "Magazine" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Unload all

Unload

��Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" soft keys.

All tools are unloaded from the magazine.

Abort

You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the "Abort" soft key. The current tool is still unloaded, but then the process is aborted. The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

7.6 Relocating a tool Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different

magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from the magazine in order to load them into a different location.

ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can

relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an empty location first is stored in a machine data code.


You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define the magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.

If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the location number you require, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also load or unload a tool directly into or out of the spindle.


Specify an empty location


��Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location.

Relocate

��Press the "Relocate" soft key.


7 Tool Management 06.03 7.6 Relocating a tool

7


��Press the "OK" soft key to relocate the tool to the suggested location.

-or-

��Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" soft key.

-or-

Spindle

��Press the "Spindle" and "OK" soft keys to load a tool into the spindle.

The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Find an empty location


��Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location.

Relocate

��Press the "Relocate" soft key.


��Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

��Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.


An empty location is suggested.


The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

7 06.03 Tool Management7.7 Entering tool wear data

7


7.7 Entering tool wear data Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can

measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in work-piece machining.

When you enter the wear data, ShopTurn checks that the values do

not exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental upper limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous and new wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum total value that you can enter. The upper limits are set in a machine data code.


��Select the "Tool wear" soft key in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

��Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.

��Enter the differences for length (∆Length X, ∆Length Z) and radius/diameter (∆Radius/∆∅ ) in the appropriate columns.

The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).

7 Tool Management 06.03 7.8 Activating tool monitoring

7


7.8 Activating tool monitoring ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically

to ensure constant machining quality.

You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify them as oversize.

Tool monitoring can be activated via a machine data code.


Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0, the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its place. Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.

Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder reaches "0".

Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters ∆ Length X, ∆ Length Z or ∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here too the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value for wear W.

Prewarning limit The prewarning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at which the first warning is displayed.

Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to use them for workpiece machining.

Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations are only reserved alternately, i.e. you can only insert the next tool in the next magazine location but one (this can also contain an oversize tool).

7 06.03 Tool Management7.8 Activating tool monitoring

7


Monitor tool use


��Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.

��In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor (T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).

��Enter a prewarning limit for the tool life, count or wear.

��Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number of workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.

The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.

If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G code commands before the end of the program in every program that calls the tools to be monitored: SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1 SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.

Enter tool status


��Place the cursor on a tool.

��Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want to disable the tool for machining.

-or-

��Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you want to mark the tool as oversize.

The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine loca-tions is now active.

7 Tool Management 06.03 7.9 Managing magazine locations

7


7.9 Managing magazine locations If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires

more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine location.

It is no longer possible to assign any tool data to a disabled magazine

location.

From the "Tool status" columns, you can also see whether a tool is disabled (G) or oversize (U). You can change the tool status settings in the tool wear list (see Section "Activate tool monitoring").

Disable magazine

location


��Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the "Location disable" column.


The letter "G" is displayed to indicate that the location is disabled.

Enable magazine location


��Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location disable" column.


The letter "G" disappears and the magazine location is now enabled again.

��

8 06.03 Program Management 8


Program Management 8.1 Program management in ShopTurn........................................................................ 8-336

8.2 Program management with PCU 20 ....................................................................... 8-337 8.2.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-339 8.2.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 8-340 8.2.3 Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive................................ 8-341 8.2.4 Create a new directory/program ............................................................................. 8-342 8.2.5 Mark several programs ........................................................................................... 8-343 8.2.6 Copy/Rename a directory or program..................................................................... 8-344 8.2.7 Delete directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-345 8.2.8 Execute program via RS-232 interface................................................................... 8-346 8.2.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 8-347 8.2.10 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 8-349 8.2.11 Back-up/Import tool or zero point data.................................................................... 8-349

8.3 Program management with PCU 50 ....................................................................... 8-352 8.3.1 Open a program ...................................................................................................... 8-354 8.3.2 Execute a program.................................................................................................. 8-355 8.3.3 Load/Unload program ............................................................................................. 8-355 8.3.4 Execute a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive ......... 8-356 8.3.5 Create directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-358 8.3.6 Mark several programs ........................................................................................... 8-359 8.3.7 Copy/Rename/Move a directory or program........................................................... 8-360 8.3.8 Delete directory/program ........................................................................................ 8-362 8.3.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 8-363 8.3.10 Display error log ...................................................................................................... 8-365 8.3.11 Back-up/Import tool or zero point data.................................................................... 8-365

8 Program Management 06.03 8.1 Program management in ShopTurn

8


8.1 Program management in ShopTurn All programs that you have created in ShopTurn for machining work-

pieces are stored in NC main memory. You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager for execution, editing, copying or renaming. Programs that you no longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.

ShopTurn offers various options for exchanging programs and data with other workstations.

• Own hard disk (PCU 50 only) • RS-232 interface • Floppy disk drive • Network connection

The following Sections explain the alternative program management functions as used with PCU 20 or PCU 50. Find out which PCU your ShopTurn system is running on and then read either "Program management with PCU 20" or "Program management with PCU 50".

8 06.03 Program Management8.2 Program management with PCU 20

8


8.2 Program management with PCU 20 In the case of the ShopTurn variant for PCU 20, all programs and data

are stored in NC main memory. You can exchange data and programs via a RS-232 interface. It is also possible to display the directory tree for a floppy disk drive or network drive.

ShopTurn user interface PCU 20

NC main memory

edit

RS-232interface

Diskette drive

edit

Network drive

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programs


Data storage with PCU 20

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the Program Manager.

PCU20 program manager

In the horizontal soft key bar, you can select the storage medium that contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In ad-dition to the "NC" soft key, via which the NC main memory data can be displayed, a further four soft keys can also be assigned.

8 Program Management 06.03 8.2 Program management with PCU 20

8


You can display the directories and programs on floppy disks and network drives:

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:

� Directory

� Program

Zero point/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information: • Name

The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.

• Type Directory: WPD Program: MPF Zero point/tool data: INI

• Size (in bytes) • Date/time (of creation or last change)

ShopTurn stores the programs in the "TEMP" directory that are created internally for calculating the stock removal procedures.

Information about memory allocation in the NC is displayed above the horizontal soft key bar.

Open a directory

-or-

��Press the "Program" soft key or the "Program Manager" key.


...

��Select the storage medium using the soft key.

��Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

-or-




8


Return to the next higher directory level

��Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.

-or-

��Place the cursor on the Return line.

-and-

-or-

��Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

The higher directory level is displayed.

8.2.1 Open a program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the process plan for the program.



��Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-




8


8.2.2 Execute a program

You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time to machine workpieces automatically.

• Open the Program Manager.

• Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute

• Press the "Execute" soft key.

ShopTurn switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads the program.

Cycle Start

• Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Machining of the workpiece is started (see Section "Machining the workpiece").

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press the "Execute" soft key to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start" key.


8


8.2.3 Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive

If the capacity of your NC main memory is already stretched, you can also execute G code programs from a floppy disk or network drive. The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.

The G code program remains stored on the floppy disk/network drive when executed from there.

ShopTurn programs cannot be executed from the floppy disk/network drive.


...

• Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate soft key.

• Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program you want to execute.

-or-

• Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The directory opens.

• Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue >

ExecuteHD

• Select the "Continue" and "Execute HD" soft keys.

ShopTurn switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads the G code program.

Cycle Start

• Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Machining of the workpiece is started (see Section "Machining the workpiece"). The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main memory while the program is being processed.


8


8.2.4 Create a new directory/program

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data trans-parently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this pur-pose in a directory. In a subdirectory or directory, you can create programs and then create program blocks within them (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn program"). The new program will be automatically stored in NC main memory for you to use.

Create a directory


New >

Directory

• Press the "New" and "Directory" soft keys.

• Enter a new directory name.

• Press the "OK" soft key.

The new directory is created.

Create a program


• Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a new program.

-or-

• Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

New >

• Press the "New" soft key.

ShopTurnprogram

• Press the "ShopTurn program" soft key if you want to create a ShopTurn program (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn program")

-or-

G codeprogram

• Press the "G code program" soft key if you want to create a G code program (see Section "G code program")


8


8.2.5 Mark several programs

You can mark several programs individually or in a block for subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Mark several programs

in a block

��Open the Program Manager.

��Place the cursor on the first program that you want to mark.

Mark


-or-

��Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or down key.

The entire block of programs is marked.

Mark several programs individually



��Press the "Select" key.

-or-

��Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.

��Press the "Select" key again.

The individually selected programs are marked.


8


8.2.6 Copy/rename a directory or program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing pro-gram, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program blocks. You can also use the functions for copying directories and programs and pasting them at a different location for the purpose of transferring data to other ShopTurn systems via a floppy disk or network drive. You can also rename directories or programs.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.

Copy directory/program


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy


��Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied directory/program.

Insert


The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.

��Press the "OK" soft key if you want to overwrite the directory/ program.

-or-

��Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory under another name.

-and-



8


Rename directory/ program


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to rename.

Rename


��Enter the new directory or program name in the field "To:". The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not permitted to have the same name.


The directory/program is renamed.

8.2.7 Delete directory/program

Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longer using to maintain the clarity of your data management system and to release NC main memory. Back up this data beforehand on an external data medium if necessary (see Section "Read program in/out via RS-232 interface").

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data

and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

If you want to release space in NC main memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP" directory. ShopTurn stores the programs here that are created internally for calculating the stock removal procedures.


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Delete

��Press the "Delete" and "OK" soft keys.

The selected directory or program is deleted.


8


8.2.8 Execute program via RS-232 interface

You can execute programs stored on external data media directly via the RS-232 interface, i.e. it is not necessary to read in these programs before you can machine a workpiece with them. If a program needs more memory space for execution than is avail-able in the NC main memory, for example, the program contents are continuously loaded via the RS-232 interface.

The RS-232 interface of the control and the external data medium

must be compatible, i.e. you must make the same settings for each RS-232 interface.


Continue >

ExecuteRS-232

��Select the "Continue" and "Execute RS-232" soft keys.

Set-upRS-232

��Press the "Set-up RS-232" soft key to set up the interface.

��Enter the desired settings.


The settings for the interface are saved.

��On the partner system, select the program that you want to execute.

��Start the transfer on the partner system.

Start


ShopTurn switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads part of the program.

Cycle Start

��Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Machining of the workpiece is started (see Section "Machining the workpiece"). The program contents are loaded continuously to the NC main memory while the program is being processed. When the program has been executed via the RS-232 interface, the program remains stored on the external medium.


8


8.2.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface

The RS-232 interface enables programs to be transferred between ShopTurn workstations by means of external data memory. The data read out function can also be used to export data that is not currently required for the purpose of releasing NC main memory. As soon as you need the exported programs, you can read them in again.

When a program is read into or read out of ShopTurn, all the

ShopTurn subroutines are transferred with it. It is also possible to read in or read out more than one program in the same operation.

The RS-232 interface of the control and the external data medium must be compatible, i.e. you must make the same settings for each RS-232 interface.

Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched tape or punched tape/ISO format) on reading out. Otherwise the partner system will not be able to interpret the data.

Read out program


��Place the cursor on the program that you want to read out.

Continue >

Read Out

��Select the "Continue" and "Read Out" soft keys.

Set-upRS-232





All files

��Press the "All files" soft key if you want to select all the programs displayed.


Start


The selected program and all its ShopTurn subroutines are read out. The "Readout" window displays the name of the program that has just been read out and the number of bytes transferred.


8


Stop

��Press the "Stop" soft key if you want to interrupt data transfer.

��Then press the "Start" soft key again to restart data transfer.

Read in program


Continue >

Read In

��Select the "Continue" and "Read In" soft keys.

Set-upRS-232





��On the partner system, select the programs that you want to read in.


Start


The "Read in" window displays the name of the program that has just been read in and the number of bytes transferred. The program is stored in the directory specified in the program header.

Stop




8


8.2.10 Display error log

If errors occur during data transfer via the RS-232 interface, ShopTurn records them in a log.


Continue >

��Press the "Continue" soft key.

Read Out -or-

Read In

��Press the "Read In" or "Read Out" soft key.

Error log

��Then press the "Error log" soft key.

The data transfer log is displayed.

8.2.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data

Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point settings. This option allows you, for example, to back up the tool and zero point data for a particular ShopTurn program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the relevant settings.

Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily into the tool management system using this option. For further details, see: References: /FBT/, Description of Functions ShopTurn

You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data • Magazine loading • Zero points • Basic zero point

You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up: • Complete tool list or all zero points • All tool data or zero points used in the program

Magazine loading data can be read out only if your system supports the loading and unloading of tool data to or from the magazine (see Chapter "Tool Management", Section "Loading or unloading a tool in the magazine").


8


Back up data


��Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data you wish to back up.

Continue >

Back UpData

��Select the "Continue" and "Back Up Data" soft keys.

��Select the data you want to back up.

��Change the suggested name if you want to. The name of the originally selected program with extension "..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point file.


The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which the selected program is stored. If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will now be overwritten with the new data.

Read in data


��Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish to read back in.

Execute

-or- ��Select the "Execute" soft key or the "Input" key.

The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

��Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.


The data are read in. Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn will do the following:

All tool offset data All data in the tool management system is deleted first. The backup data is then read in.

All tool offset data used in the program If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

��Select the "Replace all" soft key to read in all tool data. Any existing tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.


8


-or-

Replacenone

��Select the "Replace none" soft key if you want to cancel the data import.

-or-

��Select the "No" soft key if you want to keep the old tool. If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated there.

-or-

��Select the "Yes" soft key if you want to overwrite the old tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with loading/unloading. If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Work offsets Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are imported.

Magazine loading If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are entered without location number in the tool list.


8


8.3 Program management with PCU 50 The ShopTurn variant with PCU 50 has its own hard disk in addition to

the NC user memory. This makes it possible to store all programs that are not currently required in the NC on the hard disk. It is also possible to display the directory management of a floppy disk or network drive and programs and data can be read in or out via an RS-232 interface.

ShopTurn user interface PCU 50

NC main memory

edit

RS-232interface

Data manage-ment on harddisk

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programsedit

edit

load

unload

saveDiskette drive

edit

Network drive



Data storage with PCU 50

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the Program Manager.

PCU 50 program manager

In the horizontal soft key bar, you can select the storage medium that contains the directories and programs that you want to display.


8


In addition to the "NC" soft key, via which the data in the NC main memory and the data management directories on the hard disk can be displayed, a further 4 soft keys can also be assigned. You can display the directories and programs of the following storage media: • Network drives (network card necessary) • Floppy disk drive • The hard disk as archive directory

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:

� Directory

� Program

Zero point/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information: • Name

The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.

• Type Directory: WPD Program: MPF Zero point/tool data: INI

• Loaded A cross in the "Loaded" column indicates whether the program is still in NC main memory (X) or whether it has been read out to hard disk ( ).

• Size (in bytes) • Date/time (of creation or last change)

ShopTurn stores the programs in the "TEMP" directory that are created internally for calculating the stock removal procedures.

Information about memory allocation on the hard disk and in the NC is displayed above the horizontal soft key bar.


8


Open a directory

-or-

��Press the "Program" soft key or the "Program Manager" key.


...

��Select the storage medium using the soft key.

��Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

-or-



Return to the next higher directory level

��Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.

-or-

��Place the cursor on the Return line.

-and-

-or-

��Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

The higher directory level is displayed.

8.3.1 Open a program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the process plan for the program.



��Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-




8


8.3.2 Execute a program

You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time to machine workpieces automatically.


��Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute


ShopTurn switches to "Machine Auto" operating mode and loads the program.

Cycle Start

��Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

Machining of the workpiece is started (see Section "Machining the workpiece").

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press the "Execute" soft key to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start" key.

8.3.3 Load/unload program

If you do not want to execute a program in the near future, you can unload it from NC main memory. The program is then stored on hard disk and NC main memory is free again.

As soon as you execute a program that was stored on hard disk, it is

loaded into NC main memory again. You can, however, load one or more ShopTurn programs into NC main memory again without executing them immediately.

Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be unloaded from NC main memory to the hard disk.

Unload program


��Place the cursor on the program that you want to unload from NC main memory.


8


Continue >

Manualunload

��Press the "Continue" and "Manual unload" soft keys.

The selected program is no longer marked with an "X" in the "Loaded" column. In the line in which the available memory space is displayed, you can see that NC main memory has become free again.

Load program


��Place the cursor on the program that you want to load into NC main memory.

Continue >

Manualload

��Press the "Continue" and "Manual load" soft keys.

The selected program is now marked with an "X" in the "Loaded" column.

8.3.4 Execute a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive

If the capacity of your NC main memory is already stretched, you can also execute G code programs from the hard disk or a floppy disk or network drive. The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.

The G code program remains stored on the hard disk or floppy disk/ network drive when executed from there.

ShopTurn programs cannot be executed from the hard disk or floppy disk/network drive.

Run a G code program

from the hard disk


��Position the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program that you want to execute from hard disk.

-or-



��Position the cursor on the G code program that you want to execute from hard disk (without "X").


8


Continue >

ExecuteHD

��Select the "Continue" and "Execute HD" soft keys.


Cycle Start



Execute a G code program from floppy disk or network drive


...

��Select the floppy disk/network drive via the appropriate soft key.

��Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program you want to execute.

-or-


The directory opens.

��Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue >

ExecuteHD

��Select the "Continue" and "Execute HD" soft keys.


Cycle Start




8


8.3.5 Create directory/program

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this purpose in a directory. In a subdirectory or directory, you can create programs and then create program blocks within them (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn program"). The new program will be automatically stored in NC main memory for you to use.

Create a directory


New

Directory

��Press the "New" and "Directory" soft keys.

��Enter a new directory name.


The new directory is created.

Create a program


��Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a new program.

-or-


New

��Press the "New" soft key.

ShopTurn program

��Press the "ShopTurn program" soft key if you want to create a ShopTurn program (see Section "Creating a ShopTurn program")

-or-

G code program

��Press the "G code program" soft key if you want to create a G code program (see Section "G code program")


8


8.3.6 Mark several programs

You can mark several programs individually or in a block for subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Mark several programs

in a block



Mark


-or-

��Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or down key.

The entire block of programs is marked.

Mark several programs individually



��Press the "Select" key.

-or-

��Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.

��Press the "Select" key again.

The individually selected programs are marked.


8


8.3.7 Copy/rename/move a directory or program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program blocks. You can also move directories or programs or rename them. You can also use the functions for copying directories and programs or cutting them for pasting at a different location for the purpose of transferring data to other ShopTurn systems via a floppy disk or network drive.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.

Copy directory/program


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy


��Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied directory/program.

Insert


The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.


-or-


-and-



8


Rename directory/ program


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to rename.

Rename


��Enter the new directory or program name in the field "To:". The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not permitted to have the same name.


The directory/program is renamed.

Move directory/program


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to move.

Cut


The selected directory/program is deleted at this point and stored in buffer memory.

��Select the directory level in which you want to insert the directory/program.

Insert


The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.


-or-


-and-



8


8.3.8 Delete directory/program

Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longer using to maintain a clearer overview of your data management.Back up this data beforehand on an external data medium if necessary (see Section "Read program in/out via RS-232 interface").

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data

and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

If you want to release space in NC main memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP" directory. ShopTurn stores the programs here that are created internally for calculating the stock removal procedures.


��Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Cut

��Press the "Cut" and "OK" soft keys.

The selected directory or program is deleted.


8


8.3.9 Read program in/out via RS-232 interface

The RS-232 interface enables programs to be transferred between ShopTurn workstations by means of external data memory. The data read out function can also be used to export data that is not currently required for the purpose of releasing NC main memory of hard disk space. As soon as you need the exported programs, you can read them in again.

When a program is read into or read out of ShopTurn, all the

ShopTurn subroutines are transferred with it. It is also possible to read in or read out more than one program in the same operation.

The RS-232 interface of the control and the external data medium must be compatible, i.e. you must make the same settings for each RS-232 interface.

Make sure that you set the correct file format (binary/PC, punched tape or punched tape/ISO format) on reading out. Otherwise the partner system will not be able to interpret the data.

Read out program


��Place the cursor on the program that you want to read out.

Continue >

Read Out

��Select the "Continue" and "Read Out" soft keys.

Set-upRS-232





All files

��Press the "All files" soft key if you want to read out all the programs displayed.


Start


The selected program and all its ShopTurn subroutines are read out. The "Readout" window displays the name of the program that has just been read out and the number of bytes transferred.


8


Stop



Read in program


Continue >

Read In

��Select the "Continue" and "Read In" soft keys.

Set-upRS-232





��On the partner system, select the programs that you want to read in.


Start

��Press "Start" soft key.

The "Read in" window displays the name of the program that has just been read in and the number of bytes transferred. The program is stored in the directory specified in the program header.

Stop




8


8.3.10 Display error log

If errors occur during data transfer via the RS-232 interface, ShopTurn records them in a log.


Continue >

��Press the "Continue" soft key.

Read In -or-

Read Out

��Press the "Read In" or "Read Out" soft key.

Error log

��Then press the "Error log" soft key.

The data transfer log is displayed.

8.3.11 Back-up/import tool or zero point data

Apart from programs, you can also save/read in tool data and zero point settings. You can use this option for example to back up the tool and zero point data for a particular ShopTurn program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the relevant settings.

Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily into the tool management system using this option. For further details, see: References: /FBT/, Description of Functions ShopTurn

You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data • Magazine loading • Zero points • Basic zero point

You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up: • Complete tool list or all zero points • All tool data or zero points used in the program

Magazine loading data can be read out only if your system supports the loading and unloading of tool data to or from the magazine (see Chapter "Tool Management", Section "Loading or unloading a tool in the magazine").


8


Back up data


��Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data you wish to back up.

Continue >

Back UpData

��Select the "Continue" and "Back Up Data" soft keys.

��Select the data you want to back up.

��Change the suggested name if you want to. The name of the originally selected program with extension "..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point file.


The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which the selected program is stored. If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will now be overwritten with the new data.

Read in data


��Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish to read back in.

Execute

-or-

-or-

��Select the "Execute" soft key or the "Cursor right" or "Input" key.

The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

��Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.


The data are read in. Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn will do the following:

All tool offset data All data in the tool management system is deleted first. The backup data is then read in.

All tool offset data used in the program If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

��Select the "Replace all" soft key to read in all tool data. Any existing tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

-or-


8


Replacenone

��Select the "Replace none" soft key if you want to cancel the data import.

-or-

��Select the "No" soft key if you want to keep the old tool. If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated there.

-or-

��Select the "Yes" soft key if you want to overwrite the old tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with loading/unloading. If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Work offsets Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are imported.

Magazine loading If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are entered without location number in the tool list.

��

�


8


Notes

9 06.03 Messages, Alarms and User Data 9


Messages, Alarms and User Data 9.1 Messages................................................................................................................ 9-370

9.2 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 9-370 9.2.1 Cycle alarms ........................................................................................................... 9-371 9.2.2 ShopTurn alarms..................................................................................................... 9-376

9.3 User data................................................................................................................. 9-388

9.4 Version display........................................................................................................ 9-390

9 Messages, Alarms and User Data 06.03 9.1 Messages

9


9.1 Messages In the dialog line, ShopTurn outputs messages that provide you with

operating advice or progress information. The displayed messages do not interrupt the machining process.

Dialog line with message

9.2 Alarms If errors are detected in ShopTurn, the system generates an alarm

and aborts program execution if necessary. You can display the alarms complete with alarm code, date, error text and cancel criterion. The error text indicates the possible error cause.

Warning

If you ignore an alarm that occurs, and do not rectify its cause, this can result in damage to the machine, workpiece, stored settings and even to your health.

The alarm numbers are assigned to different areas as follows:

61000–62999 Cycles 100000–100999 Basic system 101000–101999 Diagnosis 102000–102999 Services 103000–103999 Machine 104000–104999 Parameters 105000–105999 Programming 106000–106999 Reserved 107000–107999 OEM 110000–110999 Reserved 111000–112999 ShopTurn 120000–120999 Reserved

In the following Sections, only the cycles and ShopTurn alarms are explained. For a description of all other alarms, see References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide SINUMERIK 840D/ 840Di/810D

9 06.03 Messages, Alarms and User Data9.2 Alarms

9


��Press the "Alarm list" soft key.

The list of active messages and alarms is displayed.

��Check the machine carefully with reference to the alarm description.

��Rectify the cause of the alarm.

Reset Cycle Start

��Press the key that is shown alongside the alarm to cancel the alarm.

-or-

��Switch the machine or control system off and on again if the main switch symbol (POWER ON) is displayed next to the alarm.

9.2.1 Cycle alarms

Alarm number Alarm text Explanation, remedy 61000 "No tool offset active" The cutting edge number D for the tool must

be programmed before the cycle call. 61001 "Thread pitch incorrectly defined" The thread size and pitch are incompatible. 61002 "Machining type incorrectly

defined" Change the machining type.

61003 "No feedrate programmed in cycle"

Change the feedrate.

61006 "Tool radius too large" Select a smaller tool. 61007 "Tool radius too small" Select a larger tool. 61009 "Active tool number = 0" Load the required tool. 61010 "Finishing allowance too large" Reduce the value for the finishing allowance. 61011 "Invalid scaling" The active scaling factor is not permissible for

this cycle. 61012 "Different scales in one plane" Cycle can be processed only with uniform

scaling in the plane. 61013 "Basic settings have been altered,

program cannot be executed" Check basic settings and change if necessary.

61101 "Reference plane incorrectly defined"

Either specify different values for the reference plane and retraction plane for relative specification of depth or enter an absolute value for the depth.

61102 "No spindle direction program-med"

The spindle direction is missing.

61103 "Number of holes is zero" The number of drill holes is missing. 61104 "Contour violation of slots" The location of the slots on the circle and their

shape are invalid.

9 Messages, Alarms and User Data 06.03 9.2 Alarms

9


61105 "Cutter radius too large" The diameter of the milling cutter is too large for the shape to be machined. Use a tool with a smaller radius or change the contour.

61106 "Number or spacing of circle elements"

The circle elements cannot be arranged within a full circle.

61107 "First drilling depth incorrectly defined"

First drilling depth is inverted in relation to total drilling depth.

61108 "No valid settings for parameters _RAD1 and _DP1"

The radius and infeed depth per revolution must be taken into account for insertion along helical path.

61109 "Parameter _CDIR incorrectly defined"

The milling direction is incorrectly defined.

61110 "Finishing allowance on base > infeed depth"

Alter setting for depth infeed if necessary.

61111 "Infeed width > tool diameter" The programmed infeed width is greater than the diameter of the active tool. The infeed width must be reduced.

61112 "Tool radius negative" The radius of the active tool is negative. This is illegal.

61113 "Parameter _CRAD for corner radius too large"

Reduce the corner radius.

61114 "Direction of machining G41/G42 incorrectly defined"

Check the machining direction of tool radius compensation left/right and alter.

61115 "Approach or retract mode (line/circle/plane/space) incor-rectly defined"

An incorrect contour approach or retract mode was defined. Check the approach/retract mode or approach/retract strategy parameter.

61116 "Approach or retract path = 0" The approach or retract path is set to zero, it must be increased.

61117 "Active tool radius <= 0" The radius of the active tool is negative or zero. This is illegal.

61118 "Length or width = 0" The length or width of the milling surface is illegal.

61119 "Nominal or core diameter incorrectly programmed"

Check thread geometry.

61120 "Thread type internal, external not defined"

You must enter the internal, external thread type.

61121 "Number of teeth/cutting edge missing"

Enter the number of teeth/cutting edge for the active tool in the tool list.

61122 "Safety clearance in the plane incorrectly defined"

The safety clearance is negative or zero. This is illegal.

61124 "Infeed width is not programmed" In active simulation without a tool, a value for the infeed width must always be programmed.

61125 "Technology selection in parameter _TECHNO incorrectly defined"

Check settings in machine data 9855 and 9856.


9


61126 "Thread length too short" Check thread geometry. 61127 "Speed ratio of tapping axis

incorrectly defined (machine data)"

Check settings in machine data 31050 and 31060.

61128 "Insertion angle = 0 for insertion via oscillation or helix"

Use larger insertion angle.

61200 "Too many elements in machining block"

Edit machining block, delete elements if necessary.

61201 "Incorrect sequence in machining block"

Sort the machining block sequence.

61202 "Not a technology cycle" Program technology block. 61203 "Not a position cycle" Program positioning block. 61204 "Unknown technology cycle" Delete and reprogram technology block. 61205 "Unknown position cycle" Delete and reprogram positioning block. 61210 "Block search element not found" Repeat block search. 61212 "Incorrect tool type" Select a new tool type. 61213 "Circle radius too small" Enter a larger value for the circle radius. 61214 "No pitch programmed" Program the pitch. 61215 "Blank dimension incorrectly

programmed" Check dimensions of blank spigot. The blank spigot must be larger than the finished spigot.

61216 "Feed/tooth possible only for milling tools"

Set another feed type.

61217 "Cutting rate programmed for tool radius 0"

Enter a cutting rate setting.

61218 "Feed/tooth programmed, but number of teeth is zero"

Enter the number of teeth of the cutting tool in the "Tool list" menu.

61222 "Plane infeed greater than tool diameter"

Reduce plane infeed.

61223 "Approach path too small" Enter a larger value for the approach path. 61224 "Retract path too small" Enter a larger value for the retract path. 61233 "Thread inclination incorrectly

defined" Check thread geometry.

61235 "ShopTurn program cannot be executed; not yet tested by ShopTurn"

Simulate the program in ShopTurn first or load it in "Machine Auto" operating mode.

61236 "ShopTurn subroutine cannot be executed; not yet tested by ShopTurn"

Simulate the subroutine in ShopTurn first or load it in "Machine Auto" operating mode.

61237 "Retract direction unknown. Retract tool manually"

Move the tool manually out of the return zone defined in the program header and start the program again.


9


61238 "Machining direction unknown." Please contact your Siemens office. 61239 "Tool change point in retraction

area" Enter another tool change point. The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area to ensure that no tool can enter the retraction area when the tool turret rotates.

61240 "Incorrect feed type" Check the feed type. 61241 "Return plane not defined for this

machining direction" Define other return planes.

61242 "Incorrect machining direction" Check programmed parameters. 61243 "Correct the tool change point:

tool tip in retraction area" Enter another tool change point. The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area to ensure that no tool can enter the retraction area when the tool turret rotates.

61244 "Undefined thread due to thread pitch change"

Check thread geometry.

61246 "Safety clearance too small" Increase safety clearance. 61247 "Blank radius too small" Increase the radius of the blank. 61248 "Infeed too small" Increase the infeed. 61249 "Number of edges too small" Increase the number of edges. 61250 "Too small across the flats/along

the edge" Increase the width across flats/edge length.

61251 "Too large across the flats/along the edge"

Reduce the width across flats/edge length.

61252 "Chamfer/radius too large" Reduce the chamfer/radius. 61253 "No finishing allowance

programmed" Program the finishing allowance.

61254 "Error traveling to fixed stop" Specify another Z1 position for gripping the counterspindle.

61255 "Error parting: Tool break?" Workpiece has not been completely parted. Check the tool.

61257 "Counterspindle start-up incomplete"

Check display machine data 9803, 9851, 9852, 9853 and 9854.

61258 "Set parameters for counter-spindle chuck in spindle screen"

Specify parameters ZL1, ZL2 and ZL3 in the "Tools WO" � > � "Spindles" screen form.

61261 "Center offset too large" Center offset for centric drilling is above permitted value (see display machine data 9862).

61602 "Tool width incorrectly defined" Recessing tool is larger than programmed recess width.


9


61604 "Active tool is in violation of programmed contour"

Contour violation in relief cut elements caused by the tool clearance angle of the tool used, i.e. use another tool or check the programmed contour.

61605 "Contour incorrectly programmed" Illegal relief cut element detected. 61606 "Error on contour preparation" An error was detected during preparation of

the contour. This alarm is always output in conjunction with an NCK alarm 10930 ... 10934, 15800 or 15810 (see Diagnostics Guide).

61610 "No infeed depth programmed" Program the infeed depth. 62100 "No drilling cycle active" No modal drilling cycle has been called before

the drilling pattern cycle. 62101 "Milling direction incorrect – G3

will be generated" Climb or conventional milling programmed. However the spindle was not rotating when the cycle was called.

62103 "No finishing allowance programmed"

Program the finishing allowance.

62200 "Start spindle" Start the tool spindle before machining the thread.

62201 "Programmable offset in positive Z direction not permissible"

ShopTurn will not permit the zero point to be offset in the positive Z direction by means of a coordinate transformation. Program the zero point offset in the positive Z direction using Work offset (G54…) rather than Coordinate transformation (Program menu � Miscellaneous � Transformation � Offset).


9


9.2.2 ShopTurn alarms

111001 Cannot interpret step in line %1 Explanation %1 = Line number Step is not an element of ShopTurn Reaction Alarm display Program not loaded Remedy Delete program step or change program in PROGRAMS operating area

of SINUMERIK 840D or 810D (CNC-ISO mode). 111002 Not enough memory

Program aborted in line %1 Explanation %1 = Line number Program contains too many steps Reaction Alarm display Program not loaded Remedy Change program in operating area PROGRAMS of SINUMERIK 840D or

810D (CNC-ISO mode). 111004 File does not exist or is incorrect: %1 Explanation %1 = Name of file/contour Program cannot interpret a step with contour programming. Contour does

not exist in directory. Reaction Alarm display NC Start disable Remedy Load contour in directory. 111005 Error while trying to interpret contour %1 Explanation %1 = Name of contour Contour incorrect Reaction Alarm display NC Start disable Remedy Check machining sequence of contour. 111006 Maximum number of contour elements exceeded %1 Explanation %1 = Name of contour Max. permissible number of 50 contour elements exceeded during

interpretation of machining sequence of a contour. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Check machining sequence of contour and change if necessary. 111007 Error in line %1 %2 Explanation %1 = Line number %2 = Error description Reaction Alarm display NC Start disable Remedy Find and eliminate error


9


111008 Spindle not synchronized Explanation Spindle not synchronized Reaction Alarm display Remedy Run the spindle for at least one revolution (M3, M4). 111009 Load new tool: T%1 Explanation T%1 = Tool number The tool change program is requesting a new tool. Reaction Alarm display NC Stop Remedy Load new tool. 111010 Teach In abort: protocol overflow Explanation The teach-in operation was aborted. Reaction Alarm display The teach-in file is closed. Remedy Increase the refresh rate value by 100 to 200ms in MD 9606:

$MM_CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS. 111100 Incorrect position programmed for spindle Explanation A position outside the range of 0 - 359.999 was programmed for a

modulo axis. Reaction Alarm display

Interface signals are set Interpreter stop NC Start disable

Remedy Program a position within the range from 0 - 359.999. Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the program.

111105 No measuring system installed Explanation SPCON, SPOS or SPOSA was programmed. These functions require at

least one measuring system. According to MD: NUM_ENCS, the machine axis/spindle has no measuring system.

Reaction Alarm display Interface signals are set Interpreter stop NC Start disable

Remedy Install a measuring system. Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the program.

111106 No spindle stoppage on block change Explanation The specified spindle was programmed as a spindle or axis, but a

positioning operation was still in progress from the previous block (with SPOSA ... spindle positioning beyond block boundaries).


9


Example: N100 SPOSA [2] = 100 . . N125 S2 = 1000 M2 = 04 ;error if spindle S2 still running ;block N100 running!

Reaction NC Start disable NC Stop on alarm Alarm display Interface signals are set

Remedy Before programming the spindle/axis again after the SPOSA instruction, you should use a WAITS command to cause the program to wait for the programmed spindle position.

Example: N100 SPOSA [2] = 100 . . N125 WAITS (2) N126 S2 = 1000 M2 = 04

Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the program. 111107 Reference marker not found Explanation During referencing, the spindle rotated through a distance greater than

axis-specific MD 34 060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST without detecting a reference marker signal. The check is made during spindle positioning with SPOS or SPOSA if the spindle did not previously run with rpm servo control (S=...).


Remedy Check and correct MD 34 060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST. The value entered specifies the distance in [mm] or [degrees] between 2 zero markers. Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the program.

111108 No transition from rpm servo control to position control Explanation • An oriented spindle stop (SPOS/SPOSA) was programmed or position

control was activated for the spindle with SPCON but no spindle encoder is defined.

• On activation of position control, the spindle speed is greater than the limit speed of the measuring system.


Remedy Spindle with no encoder attached: NC language elements which require encoder signals must not be used.


9


Spindle with encoder attached: Enter the number of spindle encoders used in MD NUM_ENCS.

Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the program. 111109 Configured positioning velocity too high Note See alarm description 111 107 111110 Velocity/speed is negative Note See alarm description 111 200 111111 Set speed is zero Explanation The programmed spindle speed setpoint is zero. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Set the permissible spindle speed setpoint. 111112 Invalid gear stage Explanation An invalid gear stage was requested by the PLC. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Check the PLC program and the axis-specific NC machine data. 111115 The programmed position was not reached Note See alarm description 111 200 111126 Minus absolute value not possible Note See alarm description 111 200 111127 Plus absolute value not possible Note See alarm description 111 200 111200 Spindle positioning error Explanation Alarms 111 110, 111 115, 111 126, 111 127 and 111 200 can occur on

spindle start/stop. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Inform the service department. Please contact your Siemens office. 111300 NC Start key defective Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the NC Start

key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open contact signal = 1

Reaction Alarm display NC Start disable

Remedy Replace the key 111301 NC Stop key defective Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the NC Stop

key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open contact signal = 1


9



Remedy Replace the key 111302 Spindle Start key defective Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the Spindle

Start key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open contact signal = 1


Remedy Replace the key 111303 Spindle Stop key defective Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the Spindle

Stop key is defective, i.e. normally closed contact and normally open contact signal = 1


Remedy Replace the key 111304 Connection to PLC broken Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the

SHOPTURN-PCU connection has been interrupted. Reaction Alarm display

SHOPTURN-PLC is terminated Remedy Check PLC user program 111305 Asynchronous subroutine has not been executed Note In the asynchronous subroutine, internal settings in the NC are initiated

by the user interface. If an alarm between 111 306 and 111 310 occurs, these settings cannot be initiated.

Reaction Alarm display Remedy Perform NC reset 111306 Error on selection or deselection of constant cutting rate 111307 Error on clearing handwheel offset 111308 Error on setting upper limit for spindle speed 111309 Error on selecting tool 111310 Error on selecting work offset 111311 NC Start not possible: Deselect SBL mode Explanation You have activated a program with block search even though SBL mode

was active at the same time. Reaction NC Start disable

Alarm display Interface signals are set


9


Remedy Deselect SBL mode 111400 Unknown PLC error Explanation An error unknown to the user interface has been output by the PLC. Reaction Alarm display

NC Start disable Remedy Press POWER ON, inform Siemens. 111410 Tool was created Explanation When ShopTurn is booted the system checks that all standard tools are

present. If not, the missing tools are automatically created. If several tools are created, they are output in a group message. Meaning: Example: %1 Number of tool that was created 5 %1 First and last tool created 5...16

Reaction None Remedy None 111411 Could not create tool(s) Explanation When ShopTurn is booted the system checks that all standard tools are

present. If not, the missing tools are automatically created. In this case, the specified number of tools could not be created.


Remedy Increase machine data 18082 $MM_NUM_TOOL by the specified amount.

111900 Start only possible in main screen Explanation A G code program can only be started from the main screen of an

operating mode/operating area (except for MANUAL). Reaction Alarm display Remedy Change to the main screen of the operating mode/operating area (except

for MANUAL). Start single-step mode with NC Start.

111901 Contour is contained in current program

Processing not enabled Explanation A contour is in the current program and cannot be changed. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Stop the program. Reload the program and change it as needed.


9


111902 Start only possible with valid reference point Explanation Axes do not have a valid reference point. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Reference all axes. 112045 More insertion points required Explanation The system requires more insertion points to machine the contour

pocket. The machining process is divided into several individual operations. Residual material will be left on the workpiece.

Reaction Alarm display This alarm is only a warning. The program can be started.

Remedy If you use a smaller cutter, you may be able to perform the operation with a single insertion point.

112046 Main contour cannot be traversed Explanation The pocket contour cannot be traversed with the programmed cutting

tool. Residual material will be left on the workpiece.

Reaction Alarm display This alarm is only a warning. The program can be started.

Remedy You may be able to contour the whole pocket if you use a smaller cutter. 112052 No residual material generated Explanation No residual material has been generated.

You may not need to remove any residual material. Reaction Alarm display

This alarm is only a warning. The program can be started.

Remedy No remedial action necessary. 112057 Programmed helix violates contour Explanation The starting point you have selected for helical insertion means that the

helix is violating the programmed contour. Reaction Alarm display

This alarm is only a warning. The program can be started.

Remedy Select another starting point. Use a smaller helix radius.

112099 System error contour pocket Explanation An error has occurred during calculation of the contour pocket. Reaction Alarm display


9


The system cannot calculate the contour pocket. The program cannot be started.

Remedy Please note the error text and contact the Siemens A&D MC Hotline. 112100 Renumbering error

Initial state restored Explanation You have selected the "Renumber" soft key in the program editor. An

error during renumbering has damaged the program in the memory. The initial program must now be reloaded to the memory.

Reaction Alarm display Program has not been renumbered.

Remedy Create space in the memory, e.g. by deleting an old program. Select "Renumber" soft key again.

112200 Contour is step in current program sequence. Processing not

enabled Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under

"Program". Reaction Alarm display

The contour is an element from a loaded program and cannot be deleted or renamed.

Remedy Remove contour from the loaded program. 112201 Contour is step in current Automatic sequence. Processing not

enabled Explanation The selected contour is an element of the program loaded under

"Machine Auto". Reaction Alarm display

The contour is an element of a program loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and cannot be deleted or renamed. After program start, contours included in the current program cannot be altered under "Program" while the program is running.

Remedy Stop program run and load program under "Program". Delete contour from program.


9


112210 Tool axis cannot be reselected. Insufficient NC memory. Explanation If you select another tool axis, you must generate a new NC program.

You must save the old NC program first and then generate the new one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at this point to store the new program.

Reaction Alarm display The new tool axis selection is not implemented.

Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at least the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting programs you no longer need).

112211 System unable to process tool preselection. Insufficient NC

memory. Explanation Before a tool preselection can be processed, you must generate a new

NC program. You must save the old NC program first and then generate the new one. There is not sufficient NC memory available at this point to store the new program.

Reaction Alarm display The system does not process the preselected tool.

Remedy You must create free space in the NC memory corresponding to at least the space required by the new program (e.g. by deleting programs you no longer need).

112300 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.

Magazine is not fully loaded. Explanation The magazine is not fully loaded with tools. The number of tools defined

in machine data 18082 MM_NUM_TOOL must be placed in the magazine of tool management concept 2.

Reaction POWER ON alarm Remedy Start-up: Set up correct selection of tools 112301 Tool management strategy 2 impossible.

Magazine is not sorted according to tool list. Explanation The magazine list is not sorted according to the tool list. The tools in the

magazine of tool management concept 2 must be ordered according to T number.

Reaction POWER ON alarm Remedy Start-up: Define tools in magazine locations according to T number.


9


112360 Step was not included in program chain because program is running

Explanation The program that you want to change is currently being executed in "Machine Auto" mode. You cannot change programs when they are being executed in "Machine Auto" mode.

Reaction Alarm display Remedy End program execution in "Machine Auto" mode. 112400 Does not exist in tool management Explanation The tool specified in the program does not exist. Reaction Alarm display Remedy The tool must be created before the data backup. 112401 Could not create tool Explanation A tool could not be created when reading in tool data. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Check the tool management system. 112420 Error on inch/metric changeover! Check all data! Explanation Data conversion not completed for inch/metric changeover. Reaction Alarm display

NC Start disable Remedy Check the following data: • Display machine data:

MD9606: $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_TIMT_NEW_POS MD9656: $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST MD9658: $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_COUNT_PO_TO_RAD MD9664: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN MD9665: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT MD9666: $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH MD9670: $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKET MD10240: $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC MD20150 [12]: $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES

• Tool data for various edges D: Length Z, radius R, Wear lengths Z and R

• Work offsets: Base offset Position in X, Y, Z and A, C (if available) Work offset

• Settings in MANUAL operating mode: Return plane Safety clearance

Note This alarm is only output on a hardware fault.


9


112502 Not enough memory Program aborted in line %1

Explanation %1 = Line number Program contains too many program blocks Reaction Alarm display Program not loaded Remedy Change program in operating area PROGRAMS of SINUMERIK 840D or

810D (CNC-ISO mode). 112504 File does not exist or is incorrect: %1 Explanation %1 = Name of file/contour Program cannot interpret a program block with contour programming.

Contour does not exist in directory. Reaction Alarm display NC Start disable Remedy Load contour in directory. 112505 Error while trying to interpret contour %1 Explanation %1 = Name of contour Contour incorrect Reaction Alarm display NC Start disable Remedy Check machining sequence of contour. 112506 Maximum number of contour elements exceeded %1 Explanation %1 = Name of contour Max. permissible number of 50 contour elements exceeded during

interpretation of machining sequence of a contour Reaction Alarm display Remedy Check machining sequence of contour and change if necessary. 112541 Program cannot be interpreted Explanation Cannot interpret program as ShopTurn program because program

header missing Reaction Alarm display

NC Start disable Remedy – 112601 ShopTurn XXXX Explanation A system error has occurred. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Please note the error text and contact the Siemens A&D MC Hotline. 112604 Connection to PLC broken Explanation Checkback signal to the PLC user program indicating that the ShopTurn-

PCU connection has been interrupted.


9


Reaction Alarm display ShopTurn PLC is terminated

Remedy Check PLC user program. 112605 Asynchronous subroutine has not been executed Note Input values could not be processed correctly by the NC. Reaction Alarm display Remedy Perform NC reset. 112650 Unknown PLC error Explanation An error unknown to the user interface has been output by the PLC. Reaction Alarm display

NC Start disable Remedy Press POWER ON, inform Siemens.

9 Messages, Alarms and User Data 06.03 9.3 User data

9


9.3 User data User data are variables that are used internally both by ShopTurn and

G code programs. These user data can be displayed in a list.

The following types of variables are defined:

• Global User Data (GUD) Global user data is valid in all programs. The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled via keyswitch or password.

• Local User Data (LUD)

Local User Data is only valid in the program or subroutine in which it was defined. When executing the program, ShopTurn displays the LUD between the current block and the end of the program. If you press the "Cycle Stop" key, the LUD list is updated. The values, however, are continuously updated.

• Global Program User Data (PUD) Global program user data is created from the local variables (LUD) defined in the main program. PUD is valid in all subroutines, where it can also be read and written. The local data is also displayed with the global program user data.

• Channel-specific user data Channel-specific user data is only applicable in one channel.

ShopTurn does not display AXIS and FRAME type user data.

The variables displayed by ShopTurn will be listed in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual.

Display user data

-or-

��Press the "Tools WOs" soft key or the "Offset" key.


��Press the "User data" soft key.

Globaluser data ...

Programuser data

��Activate one of the soft keys to choose the user data that you want to display.

9 06.03 Messages, Alarms and User Data9.3 User data

9


GUD + or

GUD –

��You can press the "GUD +" and "GUD –" soft keys to display the global and channel-specific user data from GUD 1 to GUD 9.

Search user data

Search


��Enter the text string that you want to locate. You can search for any character string.


The user data is displayed.

Find next


The next user data that contains the search string is displayed.

9 Messages, Alarms and User Data 06.03 9.4 Version display

9


9.4 Version display The ShopTurn and NCU version can be viewed in the CNC-ISO user

interface. The version of ShopTurn PLC can be seen on the ShopTurn start-up screen.

��Switch to the CNC-ISO user interface.

Diagnosis

Service displays

��Press the "Diagnosis" and "Service displays" soft keys.

Version

NCU version

��Press the "Version" and "NCU version" soft keys.

The NCU version is displayed at the top of the window that appears: xx.yy.zz 810D or 840D

MMC version

��Press the "MMC version" soft key.

The ShopTurn version can be seen in the list that appears. PCU 50: ShopTurn.......... V xx.yy.zz PCU 20: cmm.dll............. V xx.yy.zz

��

10 06.03 Examples 10


Examples 10.1 Standard machining operations ............................................................................ 10-392

10.2 Contour milling ...................................................................................................... 10-404

10 Examples 06.03 10.1 Standard machining operations

10


10.1 Standard machining operations Workpiece drawing

4x∅ 5

∅ 90

23

∅ 32

X 5:18

4 15°15°

R1 R1

FS3

FS2R6

X 5

M48

x2

∅60

3x45°

1035

70

80

8595

R23FS1 FS1

∅ 3

4

23

4°

R8

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅ 90 x 120 mm Material: Aluminum

Tools Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6 Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4 Finishing tool 35°, R0.4 Recessing tool Tip width 4 Threading tool_2 Drill ∅ 5 Milling tool ∅ 8

10 06.03 Examples10.1 Standard machining operations

10


Program

1. Create a new program ��Press the

New

and ShopTurnprogram soft keys in the "Program

manager" operating area in the appropriate directory.

��Enter program names (here: Demopart_1).

��Press the soft key.

2. Program header The "Program header" parameter screen appears. ��Define blank:

Blank Cylinder XA 90 abs. ZA 0 abs. ZI –120 abs. ZB –100 abs. Retraction Simple XRA 2 inc. ZRA 5 inc. Tool change point MCS XT 160 abs. ZT 409 abs. SC 1 inc. S1 4000 rpm Unit of

measurement mm


3. Stock removal cycle for face turning ��Press the

Stock removal soft keys.

��Enter parameters:

T Roughing tool_80 F 0.300 mm/rev. V 300 m/min. Machining Position

Direction Face (parallel to X axis) X0 60 abs. Z0 2 abs. X1 –1.6 abs. Z1 0 abs. D 2 inc. UX 0 inc. UZ 0.1 inc.


10



4. Enter blank contour using contour calculator ��Press the

Newcontour soft keys.

��Enter contour name (here: Cont_1).


��Define start point for the contour:

X 60 abs. Z 0 abs.


��Enter the following contour elements and confirm each by

pressing the soft key:

1. Z –40 abs.

2. X 80 abs. Z –45 abs.

3. Z –65 abs.

4. X 90 abs. Z –70 abs.

5. Z –95 abs.

6. X 0 abs.

7. Z 0 abs.

8. X 60 abs. Z 0 abs.



10


Blank contour

5. Finished-part contour using contour calculator ��Press the

Newcontour soft keys.

��Enter contour name (here: Cont_2).



X 0 abs. Z 0 abs. ��Enter the following contour elements and confirm each by


1. X 48 abs. FS 3

2. α2 90°

3. Direction of rotation R 23 abs. X 60 abs. K –35 abs.

I 80 abs. Dialogselection

Dialogaccept FS 2

4. Z –80 abs. R 6

5. X 90 abs. Z –85 abs. FS 3

6. Z –95 abs.


10



Finished-part contour

6. Remove stock (roughing) ��Press the



T Roughing tool_80 F 0.300 mm/rev. V 200 m/min. Machining Stock removal

direction Longitudinal (parallel to Z axis)

Machining side Outside Machining direction ← (from end face to rear side) D 1.9 inc. Cutting depth UX 0.2 inc. UZ 0.1 inc. BL Contour Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts No



10


Stock removal

7. Removing the residual material ��Press the

Residualmaterial soft keys.


T Roughing tool_55 F 0.200 mm/rev. V 250 m/min. Machining Stock removal

direction Longitudinal (parallel to Z axis)

Machining side Outside Machining direction ← (from end face to rear side) D 2 inc. Cutting depth UX 0.200 inc. UZ 0.100 inc. Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts Yes FR 0.250 mm/rev.


8. Remove stock (finishing) ��Press the



T Finishing tool F 0.150 mm/rev. V 300 m/min. Machining


10



Longitudinal (parallel to Z axis)

Machining side Outside Machining direction ← (from end face to rear side) Allowance No Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts Yes


9. Groove (roughing) ��Press the

Groove

soft keys.


T Recessing tool F 0.150 mm/rev. V 300 m/min. Machining Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs. Z0 –70 B2 8 inc. T1 4 inc. α1 15 degrees α2 15 degrees FS1 1 R2 1 R3 1 FS4 1 D 2 inc. U 0.100 inc. N 1



10


Recess

10. Recess (roughing) ��Press the

Groove soft keys.


T Recessing tool F 0.150 mm/rev. V 300 m/min. Machining Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs. Z0 –70 B1 5.856 inc. T1 4 inc. α1 15 degrees α2 15 degrees FS1 1 R2 1 R3 1 FS4 1 N 1


11. Thread longitudinal M48x2 (roughing) ��Press the

Thread

Threadlong. soft keys.


T Threading tool_2 P 2 mm/rev.


10


G 0 S 400 rpm Cut segmentation Degressive Machining type Thread External thread X0 48 abs. Z0 0 abs. Z1 –25 abs. W 4 inc. R 4 inc. K 1.226 inc. α 30 degrees Infeed AS 10 U 0.020 inc. V 1 inc. Q 0 degrees


12. Thread longitudinal M48x2 (finishing) ��Press the soft keys

Thread

Threadlong. .


T Threading tool_2 P 2 mm/rev. G 0 S 400 rpm Machining type Thread External thread X0 48 abs. Z0 0 abs. Z1 –25 abs. W 4 inc. R 4 inc. K 1.226 inc. α 30 degrees Infeed V 1 inc. Q 0 degrees


13. Drilling ��Press the soft keys

DrillingReaming >

Drilling

.



10


T Drill F 200 mm/min. S 1000 rpm Position Face Tip/shank Tip Z1 10 inc. DT 0 s


14. Positioning ��Press the

Positions > soft keys.


Position Face Cartesian/polar Polar Z0 0 abs. C0 0 abs. L0 16 abs. C1 90 abs. L1 16 abs. C2 180 abs. L2 16 abs. C3 270 abs. L3 16 abs.


15. Rectangular pocket milling ��Press the

Pocket >

Rectang.pocket soft keys.


T Milling tool F 0.030 mm/tooth S 1800 rpm Position Face Machining type Position Single position X0 0 abs. Y0 0 abs. Z0 0 abs. W 23 L 23 R 8 α0 4 degrees Z1 5 inc. DXY 50 %


10


DZ 3 UXY 0.1 mm UZ 0.1 Insertion Center FZ 50 mm/min.


Result

Programming graphic

Process plan


10


Simulation, volume model

10 Examples 06.03 10.2 Contour milling

10


10.2 Contour milling Workpiece drawing

Ø120

R46

R50

R10

R14

R6

R10 40

80

T=5

T=3

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅ 120 x 80 mm Material: Aluminum

Tools Milling tool: ∅ 18 Milling tool: ∅ 5 Program

1. Create a new program ��Press the

New and

ShopTurnprogram soft keys in the "Program

manager" operating area in the appropriate directory.

��Enter program names (here: Contour).


2. Complete program header

The "Program header" parameter screen appears. ��Define blank:

Blank Cylinder XA 120 abs. ZA 0 abs. ZI –80 abs. ZB –50 abs.

10 06.03 Examples10.2 Contour milling

10


Retraction Simple XRA 125 abs. ZRA 2 abs. Tool change point WCS XT 200 abs. ZT 200 abs. SC 1 inc. S1 1000 rpm Unit of

measurement mm


3. Enter limit contour ��Press the

Contour milling

New contour soft keys.

��Enter contour name (here: Contour_1)



Position Face X 0 abs. Y –61 abs.


��Enter the following contour elements and confirm each with by


1. Direction of rotation

R 61 abs. Y –61 abs. I 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept


10


Limit contour


4. Enter outside contour ��Press the

Contour milling


��Enter contour name (here: Contour_2).



Position Face X 0 abs. Y 50 abs.





R 50 abs. X 0 abs. Y –50 abs.

2.

Tangent toprec. elem. Direction of rotation

R 10 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

3.


R 10 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept


10


4.


R 10 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

5.


R 10 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

6.


R 10 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

Outside contour


5. Remove stock from outside contour ��Press the

Contour milling

Remove

soft keys.


T Milling tool_18 F 0.200 mm/tooth V 200 m/min. Position Face Machining Z0 0 abs. Z1 5 inc. DXY 50 %


10


DZ 2 UXY 0 mm UZ 0 Start point Auto Insertion Center FZ 0.100 mm/tooth Retraction mode To retraction plane


6. Enter inside contour ��Press the

Contour milling


��Enter contour name (here: Contour_3).



Machining plane Face X 0 abs. Y 46 abs.





R 46 abs. X 0 abs. Y –46 abs.

2.


R 6 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

3.


R 14 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

4.


R 6 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

5.



10


R 14 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

6.


R 6 abs. X 0 abs.

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

Inside contour


7. Remove stock from inside contour ��Press the

Contour milling

Remove soft keys.


T Milling tool_5 F 0.200 mm/tooth V 250 m/min. Position Face Machining Z0 0 abs. Z1 3 inc. DXY 100 % DZ 2 UXY 0 mm UZ 0 Start point Auto Insertion Center FZ 0.100 mm/tooth Retraction mode To retraction plane


10



Result

Programming graphic

Process plan

��

A 06.03 Appendix A

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition A-411

Appendix A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-412

B References..............................................................................................................A-415

C Index ........................................................................................................................ I-427

A Appendix 06.03 A Abbreviations

A

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved A-412 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

A Abbreviations ABS Absolute dimension

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

COM Communication

CRC Cutter radius compensation

D Edge

DIN German Industry Standard

DRF Differential Resolver Function: This function in combination with an electronic handwheel generates an incremental work offset in automatic mode.

DRY Dry Run Feedrate

F Feed

GUD Global User Data

HW Hardware

INC Increment: Incremental dimension

INI Initializing Data

LED Light Emitting Diode

M01 M function: Programmed stop

M17 M function: Subroutine end

MCS Machine (Machine coordinate system)

MD Machine Data

MDI Manual Data Input (previously MDA: Manual Data Automatic)

MLFB Machine-readable product designation

MPF Main Program File

NC Numerical Control

A 06.03 AppendixA Abbreviations

A


NCK Numerical Control Kernel: The NC control comprises the components NCK, PLC, PCU and COM.

OP Operator Panel

PC Personal Computer

PCU Personal Computer Unit: Component of NC control allowing communication between operator and machine.

PLC Programmable Logic Control: Component of NC control to process control logics of machine tool.

REF Reference point approach function

REPOS Reposition function

ROV Rapid override function

RS-232 Serial Interface

S Spindle speed

SBL Single Block

SI Safety Integrated

SK Soft key

SKP Skip block

SPF Subprogram File

SW Software

T Tool

TC Tool Change

TLC Tool Length Compensation

TMZ Tool Magazine Zero

TO Tool Offset

TRC Tool Radius Compensation

V Cutting speed

A Appendix 06.03 A Abbreviations

A


WCS Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)

WO Work offset

WPD Workpiece Directory

A 06.03 AppendixB References

A


B References General Documentation

/BU/ SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE, Automation Systems for Machine Tools

Catalog NC 60 Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600

/IKPI/ Industrial Communication and Field Devices Catalog IK PI Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B2-7600

/ST7/ SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation und Micro Automation Catalog ST 70 Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A8-7600

/Z/ MOTION-CONNECT Cable, Connectors & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK, MASTERDRIVES and SIMOTION Catalog NC Z Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-B1-7600

Electronic Documentation

/CD1/ The SINUMERIK System (11.02 Edition)

DOC ON CD (includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802 and SIMODRIVE publications) Order No.: 6FC5298-6CA00-0BG3

A Appendix 06.03 B References

A


User Documentation

/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.99 Edition) Short Guide AutoTurn Operation Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA30-0BP2

/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.02 Edition) Operator's Guide AutoTurn Graphic Programming System Programming / Setup Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA40-0BP3

/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.00 Edition) Operator's Guide MMC Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA00-0BP0

/BAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Operator's Guide HMI Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF00-0BP2

/BAH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Operator's Guide HT 6 Order No.: 6FC5298-0AD60-0BP2

/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (02.01 Edition) Short Guide Operation Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA10-0BP0

/BAM/ SINUMERIK 810D/840D (08.02 Edition) Operation/Programming ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD00-0BP0

/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Operation/Programming ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP1

/BAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition) Operation/Programming ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

/BEM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition) Operator's Guide HMI Embedded Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP2

/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) User's Guide Measuring Cycles Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA70-0BP2

/BTDI/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (04.03 Edition) Motion Control Information System (MCIS) User's Guide Tool Data Information Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE01-0BP0

/CAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition) Operator's Guide CAD-Reader Order No.: (included in online help)

/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Diagnostics Guide Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA20-0BP3


A


/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition) Short Guide ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD40-0BP0

/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition) Short Guide ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD30-0BP0

/KAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (07.01 Edition) Short Guide ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF20-0BP0

/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Programming Guide Fundamentals Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB00-0BP2

/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Programming Guide Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB10-0BP2

/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (10.00 Edition) Short Guide Programming Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB30-0BP0

/PGM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Programming Guide ISO Milling Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC20-0BP2

/PGT/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Programming Guide ISO Turning Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC10-0BP2

/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Programming Guide Cycles Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB40-0BP2

/PI/ PCIN 4.4 Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module Order No.: 6FX2060-4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German) Order from: WK Fürth

/SYI/ SINUMERIK 840Di (02.01 Edition) System Overview Order No.: 6FC5298-6AE40-0BP0

Manufacturer/Service Documentation a) Lists /LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

SIMODRIVE 611D Lists Order No.: 6FC5297-6AB70-0BP3

b) Hardware /ASAL/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)

Planning Guide General Information for Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC62-0BP0


A


/APH2/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1PH2 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC63-0BP0



/APL6/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1PL6 Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC66-0BP0

/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Operator Components Manual Order No.: 6FC5297-6AA50-0BP2

/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.03 Edition) User's Guide (HW) Absolute Position Sensor with Profibus-DP Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP2

/EMV/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE (06.99 Edition) Planning Guide EMC-Installation Guide Order No.: 6FC5297-0AD30-0BP1 The current Declaration of Conformity is available under the following Internet address: http://www4.ad.siemens.de Please enter the ID No.: 15257461 in the "Search" field (top right) and click on "go".

/GHA/ SINUMERIK/SIMOTION (02.03 Edition) ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes Manual Order No.: 6FC5297-0BA01-0BP1

/PFK6/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FK6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD05-0BP0

/PFK7/ SIMODRIVE (01.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FK7 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD06-0BP0

/PFS6/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FS6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD08-0BP0


A


/PFT5/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FT5 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD01-0BP0

/PFT6/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FT6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD02-0BP0

/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition) Configuring Manual CCU (HW) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD10-0BP1

/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D (10.02 Edition) Configuring Manual NCU NC 561.2-573.4 (HW) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC10-0BP2

/PJAL/ SIMODRIVE (01.03 Edition) Planning Guide Three-Phase AC Servomotors General Part for 1FT/1FK Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD07-0BP0

/PJFE/ SIMODRIVE (02.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC00-0BP4

/PJF1/ SIMODRIVE (12.02 Edition) Installation Guide 1FE1 051.-1FE1 147. Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 610.43000.02

/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE (06.02 Edition) Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors ALL General Information about Linear Motors 1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor 1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor CON Connections Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB70-0BP3

/PJM/ SIMODRIVE (11.00 Edition) Planning Guide Motors Three-Phase AC Servo Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA20-0BP4

/PJM2/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition) Planning Guide Servomotors Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC20-0BP0

/PJTM/ SIMODRIVE (08.03 Edition) Planning Guide 1FW6 Integrated Torque Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD00-0BP0

/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611 (02.03 Edition) Planning Guide Inverters Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA00-0BP6


A


/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (07.02 Edition) Configuring/Installation Guide Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1

/PMHS/ SIMODRIVE (12.00 Edition) Installation Guide Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives SIZAG2 Toothed-Wheel Encoder Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3

/PMS/ SIMODRIVE (02.03 Edition) Planning Guide ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD04-0BP0

/PPH/ SIMODRIVE (12.01 Edition) Planning Guide 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7 Motors AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC60-0BP0

/PPM/ SIMODRIVE (11.01 Edition) Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD03-0BP0

c) Software /FB1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC20-0BP2 A2 Various Interface Signals A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead B2 Acceleration D1 Diagnostic Tools D2 Interactive Programming F1 Travel to Fixed Stop G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC K1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation Mode K2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset K4 Communication N2 EMERGENCY STOP P1 Transverse Axes P3 Basic PLC Program R1 Reference Point Approach S1 Spindles V1 Feeds W1 Tool Offset


A


/FB2/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2) including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC30-0BP2 A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs B4 Operation via PG/PC F3 Remote Diagnostics H1 JOG with/without Handwheel K3 Compensations K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement L1 FM-NC Local Bus M1 Kinematic Transformation M5 Measurement N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals N4 Punching and Nibbling P2 Positioning Axes P5 Oscillation R2 Rotary Axes S3 Synchronous Spindles S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3/higher/FBSY/) S6 Stepper Motor Control S7 Memory Configuration T1 Indexing Axes W3 Tool Change W4 Grinding

/FB3/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3) (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC80-0BP2 F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation G1 Gantry Axes G3 Cycle Times K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding T3 Tangential Control TE0 Installation and Activation of Compile Cycles TE1 Clearance Control TE2 Analog Axis TE3 Master-Slave for Drives TE4 Transformation Package Handling TE5 Setpoint Exchange TE6 MCS Coupling TE7 Retrace Support TE8 Path-Synchronous Switch Signal V2 Preprocessing W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation


A


/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition) Description of Functions Drive Functions (the various sections are listed below) Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA80-1BP0 DB1 Operation Messages/Alarm Reactions DD1 Diagnostic Functions DD2 Speed Control Loop DE1 Extended Drive Functions DF1 Enable Commands DG1 Encoder Parameterization DL1 Linear Motor MD DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller Data DS1 Current Control Loop DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations

/FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (02.00 Edition) Description of Functions ANA MODULE Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB80-0BP0

/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D (07.99 Edition) Description of Functions Digitizing Order No.: 6FC5297-4AC50-0BP0 DI1 Start-up DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan) DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser) DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)

/FBDN/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition) Motion Control Information System (MCIS) Description of Functions DNC NC Program Management Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE80-0BP0 DN1 DNC Plant/DNC Cell DN2 DNC IFC SINUMERIK, NC Data Transfer via Network

/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP3

/FBFE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.03 Edition) Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis Order No.: 6FC5297-0AF00-0BP2 FE1 Remote Diagnosis ReachOut FE3 Remote Diagnosis pcAnywhere

/FBH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI Configuration Package (11.02 Edition) Order No.: (supplied with the software) Part 1 User's Guide Part 2 Description of Functions

/FBH1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI Configuration Package (03.03 Edition) ProTool/Pro Option SINUMERIK Order No.: (supplied with the software)

/FBHL/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (11.02 Edition) Description of Functions HLA Module Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB60-0BP3


A


/FBIC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition) Motion Control Information System (MCIS) Description of Functions TDI Ident Connection Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE60-0BP0

/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition) Description of Functions ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD50-0BP0

/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition) Description of Functions Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC40-0BP0 BA Operator's Guide EU Development Environment (Configuring Package) PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D (03.96 Edition) Description of Functions C-PLC-Programming Order No.: 6FC5297-3AB60-0BP0

/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition) IT Solutions Description of Functions Computer Link (SinCOM) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD60-0BP0 NFL Host Computer Interface NPL PLC/NCK Interface

/FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE (07.02 Edition) Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Order No.: 6FC5297-6AB80-0BP1

/FBSP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (05.03 Edition) Description of Functions ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP1

/FBST/ SIMATIC (01.01 Edition) Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA70-0YP4

/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.02 Edition) Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD40-0BP2

/FBT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition) Description of Functions ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD70-0BP2

/FBTC/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (01.02 Edition) IT Solutions Tool Data Communication SinTDC Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5297-5AF30-0BP0


A


/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.01 Edition) IT Solutions Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE00-0BP0

/FBTP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.03 Edition) Motion Control Information System (MCIS) Description of Functions TPM Total Productive Maintenance Order No.: Document is supplied with the software

/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E (02.03 Edition) Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning Description of Functions Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB20-0BP7

/FBU2/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal (04.02 Edition) Installation Guide (enclosed with SIMODRIVE 611 universal)

/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition) Description of Functions Tool Management Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC60-0BP1

/HBA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition) Manual @Event Order No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0

/HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di (09.02 Edition) Manual SINUMERIK 840Di Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE60-0BP1

/INC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition) System Description Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC Order No.: (an integral part of the online help for the start-up tool)

/PJE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.01 Edition) Description of Functions Configuring Package HMI Embedded Software Update, Configuration Installation Order No.: 6FC5297-6EA10-0BP0 (The document PS Configuring Syntax is supplied with the software and available as a pdf-file.)

/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition) User's Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP5

/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition) Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO A)

/POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (02.03 Edition) User's Guide Distributed Servo Drive Systems Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP4


A


/POS4/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI (04.02 Edition) Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO SI)

/POS5/ SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA (04.02 Edition) Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO CD/CA)

/S7H/ SIMATIC S7-300 (2002 Edition) Installation Manual Technological Functions Order No.: 6ES7398-8AA03-8BA0 - Reference Manual: CPU Data (Hardware) - Reference Manual: Module Data

/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7-300 (03.97 Edition) Manual: STEP 7, Fundamentals, V. 3.1 Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BA0

/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7-300 (03.97 Edition) Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1 Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BR0

/S7S/ SIMATIC S7-300 (04.02 Edition) FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper Drive Order together with configuring package

/S7L/ SIMATIC S7-300 (04.02 Edition) FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive Order together with configuring package

/S7M/ SIMATIC S7-300 (01.03 Edition) FM 357.2 Multimodule for Servo and Stepper Drives Order together with configuring package

/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D SimoPro 3.1 Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives Order No.: 6SC6111-6PC00-0BA❏ Order from: WK Fürth


A


d) Installation and Start-up

/BS/ SIMODRIVE 611 analog (10.00 Edition) Description Start-Up Software for Main Spindle and Ansynchronous Motor Modules Version 3.20 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA30-0BP1

/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A (10.00 Edition) Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA60-0BP6

/IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition) Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD20-0BP1

/IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D (11.02 Edition) Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D digital start-up software SIMODRIVE 611D) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AB10-0BP2

/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition) Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE20-0BP2 AE1 Updates/Supplements BE1 Expanding the Operator Interface HE1 Online Help IM2 Starting up HMI Embedded IM4 Starting up HMI Advanced TX1 Creating Foreign Language Texts

I 06.03 AppendixIndex

I

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition I-427

C Index

3 3D probe 2-61 3-window view 3-115 A ABS 4-124 Absolute dimensions 4-124 Access authorization 1-30 Additional command 5-203, 5-256 Alarms 9-370

Cycles 9-371 ShopTurn 9-376

Angular offset 5-194 Annular slot 5-238 Approach 4-122 Approach cycle 5-302 Approach mode 5-264 Approach strategy 5-264 Arithmetic parameters 6-316 Automatic mode 2-51 Auxiliary function 3-105 Axes

Position 2-82 Repositioning 3-95 Traerse 2-80

Axis key 1-28 B Back-up tool data 8-349, 8-365 Back-up zero point data 8-349, 8-365 Basic block display function 3-94 Beginning of contour 5-201 Blank 4-132 Blank contour milling 5-280 Blank shape

Edit 3-110 Block search 3-96 Bore a chuck 2-83 Broken-line graphic 1-38 C C1 ix C3 ix Calculation methods 3-96 Centering 5-162 Chaining 4-118 Changing program settings 5-297 Channel operational messages 1-32 Channel status 1-32

Chipbreaking 5-159, 5-161, 5-164, 5-166, 5-167 Chuck dimension 2-54 Circle

Known center point 5-150 Known radius 5-152 Polar 5-157

Circular pocket 5-227 Circular spigot 5-232 Circumferential slot 5-238 Clamp spindle

Contour milling 5-250 Drilling 5-158 Mill 5-223

Close the contour 5-258 CNC-ISO operator interface 1-43 Complete 5-292 Complete machining 4-138 Contour viii Contour

Change 5-207, 5-261 Close 5-205 Copy 4-142 Create 5-201, 5-253 Exact machining 5-203 Island 5-248 Pocket 5-248 Presentation 5-199, 5-251 Rename 4-143 Rounding 5-211 Spigots 5-250 Starting point 5-201

Contour calculator 5-197, 5-248 Contour element

Append 5-207, 5-261 Create 5-202 Creating 5-255 Delete 5-209, 5-263 Insert 5-208, 5-262 Modify 5-207, 5-261

Contour end 5-253 Contour milling 5-248 Contour pocket

Center 5-268 Contour pocket

Finish 5-276 Mill 5-272

I Appendix 06.03 Index

I

Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved I-428 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) – 06.03 Edition

Predrill 5-268 Contour spigot

Finish 5-284 Contour starting point 5-253 Contour transition element 5-202, 5-256 Contour turning 5-197 Coolant 2-64 Coordinate system 1-21 Coordinate transformation 2-72

Define 5-299 Counterspindle 4-137

Machining 5-292 Settings 2-54

Cut segmentation 5-211 Cutting depth 5-211 Cutting edge 4-136 Cutting rate V 4-138 Cycle viii Cycle approach 4-122 Cycle support 6-308 D D 4-136 Dead stop 2-60 Deep hole drilling 5-164 Dialog selection

Alter 5-262 Directory

Copy 8-344, 8-360 Create 8-342, 8-358 Delete 8-345, 8-362 Move 8-361 Open 8-338, 8-354 Rename 8-345, 8-361 Select 8-338

DP 2-62 Drawer 5-195 DRF offset 3-102 Drill 2-60, 5-162

Centered 5-159 Deep hole 5-164

Dry run feedrate 3-109 Duplo number 7-325 E Emergency stop 1-27 End 6-315 End face 4-121 End of contour 5-201

Transition element 5-202 End of program 4-119, 4-132, 4-144 Engraving 5-244 Equidistant path 2-57 Error log 8-349, 8-365 External thread 5-168 F F 4-137 Face 4-121 Face C 4-121 Face Y 4-121 Feed 4-137 Feed interruption 5-212 Feedrate override 1-29 Feedrate status 1-32 Find an empty location 7-328, 7-330 Finishing 4-138 Finishing tool 2-59 Fit 4-129 Floppy disk 8-341 Floppy disk drive 8-356 Front edge 2-54 Front face 5-292 Front view 3-113 Full circle 5-176 Function group 4-136 G G code

Copy 6-314 Cut 6-314 Find 6-314 In ShopTurn program 5-304 Mark 6-313 Paste 6-314 Skip 3-101

G code block 5-304 Renumber 6-315

G code editor 6-313 G code program

Create 6-308 Execute 6-311, 8-341, 8-356

G function 3-105 Gear stage 2-79 Grinding allowance 5-206 Gripping 5-292 Groove 5-216

Residual material 5-217


I


H H function 3-105 Hard disk 8-356 Hard key

Operation 1-33 Help display 1-40 I Import tool data 8-349, 8-365 Import zero point data 8-349 INC 4-125 Inch 2-52 Inclined axis 4-120 Increment 2-81 Incremental dimension 4-125 Input field 1-41 Insert mode 1-42 Inside contour 5-256 Internal thread 5-168 K Keyswitch 1-30 L Line 5-173 Longitudinal slot 5-235 Lowercase letters 5-244 M M function 2-85, 3-105 M01 3-101 Machine control panels 1-27 Machine coordinate system 2-53 Machine zero 1-21 Machining 4-138

Simulation 3-106 Simultaneous recording 3-106

Machining direction 5-297 Machining feedrate 4-137 Machining lines 3-107

Delete 3-116 Machining plane 4-120 Machining time 3-107 Machining type 4-138 Magazine list 7-322 Magazine location

Disable 7-334 Enable 7-334

Magnifying glass 3-116 Main program 5-288 Main spindle 4-137

Settings 2-54 Manual Data Automatic 2-87 Manual mode 2-51, 2-78

M function 2-85 Positioning the axes 2-82 Spindle 2-79 Stock removal 2-83 Tool 2-78 Traversing the axes 2-80 Unit of measurement 2-86 Work offset 2-85

Marker 5-290 Matrix 5-174 MCS 2-53 MDI 2-51 Measurement

Tool 2-65, 2-67 Workpiece zero 2-71

Measuring calipers Calibrating 2-68

Measuring cycle support 6-308 Messages 9-370 Millimeter 2-52 Milling tool 2-59 Mirror writing 5-244 Mirroring 5-300 Multiple edge 5-242 Mushroom head tool 2-60 N Network drive 8-341, 8-356 New contour

Mill 5-253 Turn 5-201

New program 4-132 New tool 2-57, 7-323 Number of workpieces 4-144 O Offset 5-299 Online help 6-308 Operation 1-33 Operator interface 1-31 Operator panel

OP 010 1-22, 1-24 OP 010C 1-23 OP 010S 1-23 OP 012 1-24


I


Original 3-116 Outside contour 5-256 P Parameter

Accept 1-42 Calculate 1-42 Change 1-42 Delete 1-42 Enter 1-41 Select 1-41

Parameterization screen form 1-39 Parting 5-195 Password 1-30 Path milling 5-264 Peripheral surface 4-121 Peripheral surface C 4-121 Peripheral surface Y 4-121 Pitch circle 5-178 Plunge-turning 5-219

Residual material 5-221 Pocket

Circular 5-227 Rectangular 5-224

Pole 4-126, 5-154 Position 5-241

Freely programmable 5-171 Repeat 5-180

Position pattern Full circle 5-176 Line 5-173 Matrix 5-174 Pitch circle 5-178

Positioning block 4-119 Power ON 9-371 Prewarning limit 7-332 Process plan 1-38 Program viii

Abort 3-92 Copy 8-344, 8-360 Correct 3-104 Create 4-132, 8-342, 8-358 Delete 8-345, 8-362 Execute 8-340, 8-346, 8-355 Execute a trial run 3-93 Load 8-356 Mark several programs 8-343, 8-359 Move 8-361

Open 8-339, 8-354 Read in 8-348, 8-364 Read out 8-347, 8-363 Rename 8-345, 8-361 Select 3-90 Start 3-92 Stop 3-92 Test 3-103 Unload 8-355

Program block 4-118 Chained 4-118 Change 4-140 Copy 4-142 Create 4-136 Cut 4-142 Display 3-94 Number 4-143 Paste 4-142 Repeat 5-290 Search 4-143 Select 4-142

Program control 1-32 Program editor 4-141 Program execution

Stop 3-90 Program execution

Start 3-90 Program header 4-118, 4-132 Program management

PCU 20 8-337 PCU 50 8-352

Program manager 8-337, 8-352 Program structure 4-118 Programmed stop 3-101 Programming graphic 1-38 Protection levels 1-30 Pulling 5-292 R R variables 6-316 Radius compensation 4-137 Rapid traverse 2-82 Rapid traverse override 1-29 Reaming 5-162 Rear face 5-292 Recess 5-184 Recessing tool 2-59 Recompile 6-309, 6-310


I


Rectangular pocket 5-224 Rectangular spigot 5-230 Reference point 2-48 Remote diagnosis 1-43 Removal

Residual material 5-214 Repeat 5-290 Replacement tool 7-325 Repos 3-95 Repositioning 3-95 Reset 1-27 Residual material

Contour pocket 5-274 Groove 5-217 Plunge-turning 5-221 Removal 5-214 Spigot 5-282

Retract mode 5-264 Retract strategy 5-264 Retraction 4-133, 5-297 Return 4-122 Return cycle 5-302 Rotary drill 2-58, 2-61, 7-323 Rotation 5-299 Rotation C 5-300 Roughing 4-138 Roughing tool 2-59 RS-232 interface 8-346, 8-363 S S 4-137 S1 ix, 1-31 S2 ix, 1-31 S3 ix, 1-31 Safety clearance 4-134 Safety Integrated 2-50 Scale 2-77 Scaling 5-300 Screw tap 2-61 Search

Block 3-98 Text 3-100

Secondary mode 1-32 Select a dialog 5-203, 5-256 Select units 1-42 Selected dialog

Alter 5-208 Set machining area limits 5-212

Settings Change 5-297

Side view 3-112 Simulation 3-107, 6-311 Simultaneous recording

Before machining 3-109 During machining 3-110

Single block 3-93 Single block fine 3-93 Skip 3-102 Slot

Circumferential 5-238 Longitudinal 5-235

Slot wall offset 5-265 Soft key

Accept 1-36 Back 1-36 Cancel 1-36 CNC ISO 1-43 OK 1-36 Operation 1-33 Overview 4-130

Special axis ix Special characters 5-245 Speed limit 4-134 Spigot

Circular 5-232 Rectangular 5-230

Spindle override 1-29 Spindle speed 4-137 Spindle status 1-32 Start 6-315 Stock removal 5-159, 5-161, 5-164, 5-166, 5-181,

5-210 Manual mode 2-83

Stop edge 2-54 Straight 5-149

Polar 5-155 Subroutine 5-288 Switching off 2-48 Switching on 2-48 Synchronization point 5-194 T T 4-136 Tailstock 4-123, 4-133 Tangent 5-203, 5-256 Teach tool change point 4-135


I


Technology block 4-119 TEMP 8-345, 8-362 Thread

Centered 5-161 Cutting 5-190 Drill 5-166 Multiple 5-193 Re-machining 5-194

Thread undercuts 5-188 Threading tool 2-60 Tolerance class 4-129 Tolerance grade 4-129 Tool

Create 7-323 Delete 7-326 Loading 7-327 Measure 2-65, 2-67 More than one edge 7-324 Relocate 7-329 Sort 7-326 Unloading 7-328

Tool change point 4-133 Tool length compensation 2-56 Tool life 7-332 Tool list 2-62, 7-318 Tool magazine 7-322 Tool monitoring 7-332 Tool name 2-58 Tool nose radius compensation 2-57 Tool offset data 2-56, 7-319 Tool point direction

Change 2-62 Tool radius compensation 2-57 Tool spindle 4-137 Tool T 4-136 Tool type 2-62 Tool wear data 7-331 Tool wear list 7-321

Tools Create 2-57

Tool-specific data 7-320 Total offset 2-72 Turning 4-121 U Undercut

Form E 5-187 Form F 5-187 Thread 5-188

Unit of measurement 2-52, 4-132 User agreement 2-50 User data 9-388 V V 4-138 Variables 9-388 Version display 9-390 Volume model 3-114 W WCS 2-53 Work offset 2-72

Basic 2-72 Coordinate transformation 2-72 Define 2-75 Set 2-73 Total 2-72

Work offset list 2-76 Work offsets

Call 5-298 Workpiece coordinate system 2-53 Workpiece zero 1-21

Measure 2-71 Workpieces, number of 4-144 Z Z3 ix Zoom 2-70, 3-116

To SIEMENS AG

Suggestions Corrections

A&D MC BMS P.O. Box 3180 D-91050 Erlangen, Germany Phone: ++49-(0)-180-5050-222 [Hotline] Fax: ++49-(0)-9131-98-2176 [Documentation] E-mail: [email protected]

For Publication/Manual:

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D ShopTurn

User Documentation

From Name Company/Dept.

Address

Phone: /

Fax: /

Operation/Programming Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

06.03 Edition Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

Suggestions and/or corrections

User Documentation

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

SINUMERIK

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation

Brochure Catalog Ordering Info.NC 60 *)

Description of Functions Drive Functions *)

Description of Functions– Basic Machine *) – Extended Functions– Special Functions

611D840D/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Accessories

CatalogAccessoriesNC-Z

SINUMERIKSIROTECSIMODRIVE

840D/840Di810D

Lists *)Installation &Start-Up Guide *)– 810D– 840D/611D– HMI

SINUMERIK

840D

Description of FunctionsDigitizing

611D

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

Configuring Kit HMI Embedded

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Description of FunctionsSINUMERIKSafety Integrated

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D611, Motors

SIMODRIVE

DOC ON CD *)The SINUMERIK System

General Documentation

Electronic Documentation

Manufacturer/Service Documentation


SINUMERIK

840D/810D/FM-NC

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

User Documentation

DiagnosticsGuide *)

Operator’s Guide – HT 6

AutoTurn– Short Guide– Programming/ Setup

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Program. Guide– Short Guide– Fundamentals *)– Advanced *)– Cycles– Measuring Cycles– ISO Turning/Milling

Operator Components(HW) *)

Description ofFunctionsSynchronized Actions

840D/810D

SINUMERIK

Operator’s Guide– ManualTurn– Short Guide ManualTurn– ShopMill– Short Guide ShopMill– ShopTurn– Short Guide ShopTurn

840D/810D


*) These documents are a minimum requirement

Operator’s Guide *)– Short Guide– HMI Embedded– HMI Advanced

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Configuring (HW) *)– 810D– 840D

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

Description of FunctionsOperator InterfaceOP 030

Description ofFunctionsTool Manage-ment

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

840D611D

840D611D

Description ofFunctionsLinear Motor

Description of Functions– Hydraulics Module– Analog Module

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVESIROTEC

EMCGuidelines


SINUMERIK

Description of FunctionsISO Dialects for SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

Manual(HW + Installationand Start-Up)

840Di

SINUMERIK

System Overview

840Di

840D/840Di/810D/

SINUMERIK

Description of FunctionsRemote Diagnosis

840D/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

IT Solutions– Computer Link– Tool Data Information System– NC Data Management– NC Data Transfer– Tool Data Communication

SINUMERIK

Description ofFunctions– ManualTurn– ShopMill– ShopTurn

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Manual@Event

© Siemens AG, 2003Subject to change without prior notice

Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

Printed in Germany

Siemens AG Automation & Drives Motion Control Systems P.O. Box 3180, D-91050 Erlangen Germany www.ad.siemens.de

Date post:	28-Dec-2021
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	6 times
Download:	0 times

Operation/Programming 06/2003 Edition - Siemens

Documents